university of west florida - green-simmons · 2015. 3. 3. · uwf building 37 nursing program...

UWF Building 37 Nursing Program

Renovations

University of West Florida

1120 E. Cervantes Street Pensacola, FL 32501

850 434 5142 / fax 850 434 5146 January 2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS-SPECIFICATIONS Hernandez•Calhoun 65% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Design International

_______________________________________________________________________________________________ Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 – 65% Submittal University of West Florida

SECTIONS IN ITTALICS ARE UNDER DEVELOPMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS-UWF HEALTH AND WELLNESS CENTER DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 001000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 001700 GENERAL CONDITIONS (UWF DOCUMENTS) ARTICLE 01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARTICLE 02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION/PARTNERING CONFERENCE ARTICLE 03 TIME TO COMPLETE ARTICLE 04 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS ARTICLE 05 PATENTS, ROYALTIES, AND PERMITS ARTICLE 06 INSURANCE ARTICLE 07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY ARTICLE 08 PERSONNEL SUPERVISION ARTICLE 09 LAYING OUT WORK ARTICLE 10 OWNERS RIGHT TO TERMINATE ARTICLE 11 PAYMENT PROCEDURES AND LIEN WAIVERS ARTICLE 12 SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION ARTICLE 13 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE ARTICLE 14 WARRANTY ARTICLE 15 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY ARTICLE 16 THE U.S. FAIR LABOR STANDARDS ACT-FLSA ARTICLE 17 FLORIDA SEXUAL PREDATORS ACT ARTICLE 18 EMPLOYMENT OF UNAUTHORIZED ALIENS ARTICLE 19 DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE REQUIREMENT 00300 BID FORM DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

008000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 017300 EXECUTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION



DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 – METALS 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES (NOT USED) DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS (NOT USED) DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096516 RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099150 COLOR SCHEDULE DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101400 SIGNAGE 102123 CUBICLES 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED) DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLIMBING PIPING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220070 PLUMBING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 224200 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC



233300 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL 260010 CODES AND STANDARDS 260020 WORK REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS 260500 ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK 260512 ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING WORK 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 260530 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 250553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 262420 PANELBOARDS 262422 CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR EXISTING PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS 262726 GENERAL WIRING DEVICES 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 270000 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 270010 CODES AND STANDARDS 270020 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 271500 HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT USED) DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK (NOT USED) DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED) DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (NOT USED)

Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 – 65% Submittal University of West Florida

00100-1

SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1. Only properly licensed Contractors are invited to bid on a General Contract for the construction of the Nursing Program Renovations. This work includes construction of the Nursing Program Renovations as shown on the project plans and by the project manuals.

2. All bids must include lump sum prices. Unit prices must be submitted for comparison and payment

purposes.

3. The University of West Florida (Owner) will receive sealed bids from qualified licensed Contractors as indicated at http://uwf.edu/procurement under “Invitation to Bid Construction of Nursing Program Renovations”. Bids received after this time will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Bids will be opened publicly and read aloud at this time. All interested parties are invited to attend.

4. Project documents, including drawings and specifications relative thereto may be acquired online at

http://uwf.edu/procurement.

5. Submit Document 00300 in triplicate and it must be accompanied by a Certified Check or bid Bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid. Such Bid Bond or Check is given with the understanding and agreement that it guarantees: (1) that the bidder will not withdraw his bid for a period of 60 days after the bids have been opened; and, (2) that if his bid is accepted, the Bidder will enter into the written Contract with the University of West Florida and furnish the required Performance Bond Payment Bond Insurance Certificates, within 10 days after receipt of Notice of Award of his bid. Pursuant to Florida Statutes, Section 255.05, the Contractor shall be required to execute and record the performance and payment bonds. The bonds must state the name and principal business address of both the principal and the surety and a description of the project sufficient to identify it. In the event the bidder fails to comply with any of these conditions and requirements in whole or in part, the full amount of the bond or check shall be automatically forfeited to the University of West Florida as damages on account of the default of the bidder.

6. The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities in bids, to reject any or all bids with or without cause and to accept the bid that in its judgment is in the best interest of the University of West Florida.

7. Completion Time: The entire project shall be substantially complete by ______________________.

8. The date of substantial completion of the work or designated portion thereof is the date certified by the

Architect when construction is sufficiently complete and approved in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the work for the use which it was intended.

9. Liquidated damages see Special Terms and Conditions- Nursing Program Renovations.

10. Payment requests approved by the Architect for work completed satisfactorily in accordance with the

Contract Documents shall be reduced by a ten percent (10%) retainer. The ten percent (10%) retainer shall be retained by the Owner until final completion and acceptance of the work by the Architect and the University of West Florida.

END OF SECTION 00100

http://uwf.edu/procurement�

http://uwf.edu/procurement�


DIVISION 0

GENERAL CONDITIONS

Article 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Contract documents consist of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, General Conditions, Special and/or Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. Article 2. PRE-CONSTRUCTION/PARTNERING CONFERENCE Before beginning work at the site, the Contractor shall attend a “Pre-Construction/Partnering” conference and be accompanied by the superintendent employed for the work. This conference will be scheduled by the University’s Department of Architecture and Engineering Services who will arrange for all parties to be present. During this meeting the attendees will discuss developing a team effort consisting of the Owner, consultants, and contractors and afterward discuss the project work. Article 3. TIME TO COMPLETE Unless stated otherwise in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the work to be performed under this contract shall be commenced within 10 calendar days after the date indicated on the Notice to Proceed, and shall meet the Date of Substantial Completion as prescribed. Substantial completion is the date the facility can be occupied for use. Final completion, including approved completion of punch list items, must be accomplished within the time allowed. The term “substantial completion” shall not mean the inclusion of such minor alterations and patching as the final inspection shall disclose from a “punchlist.” Article 4. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS Division 1 General Requirements, technical specifications, and AIA A201 General Conditions (if applicable) may include additional requirements. If any portion of the bidding documents is in conflict with any other portion, the most stringent requirement will apply at no additional cost to the Owner. Article 5. PATENTS, ROYALTIES, AND PERMITS The contractor, without exception, shall indemnify and save harmless the University and its employees from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expenses for or on account of any copyrighted, patented, or unpatented invention, process, or alteration of the article. The contractor has no liability when such claim is solely and exclusively due to the combination, operation or use of any article supplied hereunder with equipment or data not supplied by contractor or is based solely and exclusively upon the University’s alteration of the article. The University will provide prompt written notification of a claim of copyright or patent infringement and will afford the contractor full opportunity to defend the action and control the defense. Further, if such a claim is made or pending, the contractor may, at its option and expense, procure for the University the right to continue use of, replace or modify the article to render it non-infringing. If none of the alternatives are reasonably available, the University agrees to return the article on request to the contractor and receive reimbursement, if any, as may be determined by a court of competent jurisdiction. If the contractor uses any design, device, materials, or services covered by the letters, patent or copyright, it is mutually agreed and understood without exception that the bid prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of such design, device, materials, or services in any way involved in the work.


Article 6. INSURANCE

A. General: The Contractor shall not commence work under the contract until he/she has obtained all insurance required, and it has been approved by the University of West Florida, nor shall the contractor allow any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to commence work or any portion of the work unless all insurance required of the Subcontractor has been similarly approved by the Contractor.

1. All such insurance shall be purchased only from companies licensed and duly authorized by the State of Florida to do business in Florida and to write the types of insurance policies as herein specified. The companies shall have a policyholder’s rating in the latest edition of Best’s Key Rating Guide that is satisfactory to the University. 2. The insurance coverages required under this Article shall be maintained by the Contractor, Subcontractor, and Sub-subcontractor until all work is completed by the Contractor and accepted by the University.

B. Certificate of Insurance: The contractor must provide within five calendar days of bid award notification from the University, an original ACORD Certificate of Insurance evidencing the insurances provided by the Contractor, and signed by the insurance companies or their authorized agents, certifying to the name and address of the party insured, the description of the work covered by such insurance, the insurance policy numbers, the limits of liability of the policies and the dates of their expirations with a further certification from the insurance companies that their policies will not be materially modified, amended, changed, canceled or terminated without thirty (30) days business days prior written notice to the University. Certificate must list following entities as certificate holder and additional insured as respects general and automobile liability: The State of Florida, Florida Board of Governors, University of West Florida Board of Trustees, and The University of West Florida. C. Minimum Insurance Coverages and Requirements per Appendix 1.

Article 7. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

The contractor shall manage the entire project by supervising, coordinating, and expediting the assigned contractor’s work. The contractor shall inspect the work to assure conformance with the contract documents and shall recommend to the Owner’s representative the work be rejected or that work be stopped on all unacceptable portions of the work. The contractor’s superintendent shall direct the operations of all assigned subcontractors. The subcontractors shall supervise their work in accordance with the instructions of the contractor, subject to the terms of the contract. Supervision by the contractor shall not relieve the assigned contractors from their duty to supervise and direct their own work. Duties of the contractor include, but are not limited to:

1. Communication: Enforce project lines of authority and communication. Conduct and

assure appropriate safety and progress meeting attendance. 2. Supervision: The contractor will be responsible for means, methods, techniques,

sequences, procedures, or supervision and for safety precautions and programs in connection with the project or work thereon and nothing herein shall relieve the contractor from his/her responsibility to carry out the work in accordance with the contract documents. The Owner’s on-site representative does not relieve the contractor from obligations of the contract documents.

3. Schedule: Within nine (9) calendar days after award, but prior to beginning the work, the

contractor will submit a bar chart schedule of sufficient division and section breakdown to the Owner’s representative for review and approval. Note: No work shall commence on-site until the schedule has been approved by the Owner’s representative and Architect-Engineer. The schedule will illustrate sufficient division and section detail to allow


representative trades progress to be indicated. The schedule shall be revised at intervals of not less than one (1) time per month or more often as required to provide orderly prosecution of the work within the contract time. The contractor must report changed conditions to the Owner’s representative and must verify that each of the contractor’s labor force, material deliveries, and equipment are available and adequate for maintaining the project schedule. Report conditions that will adversely affect the schedule to the Owner’s representative with recommendations for corrective action. Note: The construction schedule will be compared to the contractor’s payment requests for accuracy of reporting actual completion.

4. Responsibility for damages: The contractor shall be responsible for all loss or damage to the work, the project, the site and improvements thereon and the work of other contractors caused by his/her operation during the performance of the contract.

5. Permits: The contractor is responsible for obtaining all permits required. For information, contact the university’s Building Code Administrator at 850/473-7326.

Article 8. PERSONNEL, SUPERVISION

A. Each contractor shall keep on this work, during its progress, competent supervisory personnel including foreman and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Owner’s representative. If any supervisory personnel prove unsatisfactory to the Owner, the Owner may demand their removal, said demand must be in writing. The foreman or Project manager shall not be changed except with written consent of the Owner, unless the foreman or Project Manager proves to be unsatisfactory to the contractor and ceases to be his employee. The foreman shall represent the contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given by the contractor. On written request, such directions shall be confirmed in writing to the contractor. B. Each contractor shall give sufficient supervision to the work using his/her best skill and attention. Contractor shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications and other instructions and shall at once report to the Owner any error, inconsistency or other omission which he/she may discover.

Article 9. LAYING OUT WORK

The contractor shall, immediately upon entering the project site for purpose of beginning work, locate all general reference points and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction, layout the work and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements for work to be executed by the contractor under the contract. Note: This includes Requesting and Paying for Appropriate Utility Locations. Please read Division One, General Requirements, very carefully with respect to utility locate responsibilities. The contractor must exercise proper precaution to verify figures shown in specifications before laying out work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from the contractor’s failure to exercise such precaution. The contractor shall provide and install all the work from actual measurements taken on the site.

Article 10. OWNERS RIGHT TO TERMINATE

A. Without Prior Notice of Intent If the contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or if it should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of the contractor’s insolvency, then the Owner, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and without any prior notice to the contractor and its surety, may terminate the contract and take possession of the premises and of the materials, tools, equipment, and thereon finish the work by whatever method the University may deem expedient. In such case the contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work including compensation for additional architectural-engineering, managerial and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the contractor.


If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance the contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor’s default, shall be certified by a third party acceptable to both the Contractor and Owner. B. With Prior Notice of Intent If the Contractor fails or refuses to prosecute the work (except in cases for which the Contractor and the Owner have mutually agreed upon extensions of time as provided) with such diligence as to allow completion of performance in accordance with the approved progress schedule or fails to complete the work at the time of completion in accordance with the documents or commits a breach of any other provision of the Contract Documents, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances or instructions of the Owner’s representative, the University may terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed with the work. In such cases, the Owner will give the Contractor and its Surety, seven (7) days written notice of the intention to terminate and the reason therefore, and unless within seven (7) business days the delay or violation shall cease or satisfactory arrangement of corrections made, the Owner may issue a written termination notice for the Contractor and its Surety. If a termination notice is given, the Surety will be given the opportunity to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Such completion may include, but is not limited to, the use of a completing contractor pursuant to a written takeover agreement, the payment of a sum of money required to allow the Owner to complete the work, or other arrangements agreed to by the University and Surety. If within seven (7) business days the Surety fails to exercise its right to undertake the work, the University may take over the work, exclude the Contractor from the site, take possession of all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid the Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and incorporate such items to finish the work as the Owner may deem expedient by contract publicly advertised or otherwise. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work including compensation for additional architectural-engineering, managerial and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance the contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor’s default, shall be certified by a third party acceptable to both the Contractor and Owner.

Article 11. PAYMENT PROCEDURES AND LIEN WAIVERS The provisions of Section 255.05, F.S. provide the contractor may be paid periodically only upon compliance with the applicable provisions of Section 255.05, 713.01, and any rules adopted thereunder. All invoices must be submitted in sufficient detail to allow for a proper pre-audit and post-audit.

A. Progress Payments

: At any time prior to final completion of the contract certified under the paragraph below, the Owner shall not authorize or make payment to the Contractor in excess of ninety (90) percent of the amount due on the contract on the basis of the work suitably completed and material suitably stored on site. Upon 75% completion, retainage may be reduced to 5% at the University’s sole discretion. In case of default by the contractor, the laborers, materialmen, and subcontractors, as defined in Section 713.01, F.S., making claims for unpaid bills, will be paid from the 10 percent retainage on a pro rata basis as follows; the sum of all claims made shall be divided into each individual claim thereby deriving a percentage for each claim. The total retainage will then be multiplied by the percentage and the result shall be the prorated share to be paid to the claimants; however, the payment shall not be more than the claim.

B. Lien Waivers Accompanying Payment Requests and Release of Lien

Before progress payments are approved, each contractor shall provide in writing a “Waiver and Release of Lien” in a form acceptable to the Owner. Final payment shall not be made until the Contractor has supplied the University with releases of liens and a release of all claims from all laborers, materialmen, and subcontractors as defined in Section 713.01, F.S.


C. Payment for on-site stored materials: Payments shall be made for materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored on-site. Verification of materials will be necessary from the consultant if external design, or the University Project Manager if an in-house designed and project. The material supplier/distributor invoice(s) must accompany the contractor payment request. Payment will be made on the invoice value, less the retainage withheld. Off-site storage will not be considered for payment. D. The final payment of retainage shall not be made until the work has been inspected by the architect/engineer or other person designated by the contracting authority for that purpose and until Contractor has issued a written certificate that the work has been constructed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications and approved change orders and until the University, acting on these recommendations, has accepted the work. If project is bonded, consent of surety is required before final payment can be made.

Article 12. SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION

A. The Contractor will implement reasonable precautions to assure a safe work site that is compliant with all state and federal safety regulations, especially the Occupational Safety and Health Act requirements (OSHA, 29 CFR 1910 or 1926) and other. The Contractor will provide appropriate personnel protective equipment to required University visitors when within the construction limits of the job-site.

B. Contractor will follow trench safety for any trench safety excavation having depth in excess

of five feet and must follow the Excavation Safety Standards established by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29.C.F.,R. s. 1926.650 Subpart P. Any bidder by signature of bid assures the Owner that any such excavation performed will be in compliance. All costs incurred shall be included within the bid.

C. The Contractor or his/her designee will be responsible to assure that material handling,

barricades restricting construction zones, toxic substances, etc., are clearly marked and designated to protect workers of the Contractor or the building occupants. The presence of warning signs may not always provide sufficient protection.

D. The Contractor shall fully comply with Chapter 422, F.S. involving toxic materials and

accompanying Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Questions regarding this requirement are to be directed to: Bureau of Industrial Safety and Health, Toxic Waste Information Center, 2551 Executive Center Circle West, Tallahassee, FL 32301-5014, Tel. 1-800-367-4378.

E. A set of stamped and approved plans by the Office of the State Fire Marshall and UWF

Building Code Administrator shall be on each construction site and available for inspection.

F. State traffic regulations are enforced by University Police Officers.

G. Emergency notifications, including fires and medical emergencies, should be communicated directly to the Department of Public Safety, Bldg. 19, telephone x2911 or 474-2911.

H. The guidelines herein are representative, and not all inclusive. All contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors and their employees performing work for the University must comply with state and federal regulations.

I. Contractor should view the Environmental Health and Safety website at

http://uwf.edu/Envhs/.

http://uwf.edu/Envhs/�


Article 13. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for materials and substances brought to the job site.

B. The Contractor will be responsible for hazardous materials management in accordance with the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA).

C. All contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors and their employees performing work

for the University must comply with state and federal regulations. D. Contractor should view the university’s Procedures to identify and Manage Environmental

Issues During Demolition, Renovation and New Construction Project on the Environmental Health and Safety website at http://uwf.edu/Envhs/. Contractor may obtain full copy from the university’s Environmental Heath & Safety Department at 850/474-2177 or e-mail [email protected].

E. The guidelines herein are representative, and not all inclusive.

Article 14. WARRANTY The Contractor shall fully guarantee all items furnished hereunder against defect in materials and/or workmanship for a period of one year, except as otherwise stipulated in the technical specification sections, beginning from the Date of Substantial Completion. Article 15. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY The nondiscrimination clause contained in Section 202, Executive Order 11246, as amended by Executive Order 11375, relative to Equal Employment Opportunity for all persons without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, and the implementing rules and regulations prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, Veteran's Act 38USC4212, Section 503 - Rehabilitation Act of 1973 Title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 42USC12101, Age Discrimination Act of 1975 and UWF’s policy relative to sexual harassment are incorporated herein. Any questions should be directed to the Office of Equal Opportunity and Diversity, 850-474-2205. Article 16. THE U.S. FAIR LABOR STANDARDS ACT - FLSA The Contractor will certify that these goods and/or services were produced in compliance with all applicable requirements of Sections 6, 7, and 12 of the Fair Labor Standards Act, as amended, and of regulations and orders of the United States Department of Labor issued under Section 14 thereof. Article 17. FLORIDA SEXUAL PREDATORS ACT Any Contractor or Sub-contractor who is awarded a contract by the University must comply with F.S. 775.21 relative to the registration of any employee who is a convicted sexual offender or predator. For additional information, contact the University of West Florida Police Department at 850-474-6184. Article 18. EMPLOYMENT OF UNAUTHORIZED ALIENS The University shall consider the employment of any bidder of unauthorized aliens a violation of Section 274A(e) of the Immigration and Nationality Act. Such violation shall be cause for unilateral cancellation of this contract Article 19. DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE REQUIREMENT

The Contractor shall abide by the University’s policy regarding use, possession, manufacture, delivery or advertisement of drug paraphernalia as defined in Florida Statutes, Chapter 893.147:

http://uwf.edu/Envhs/�

mailto:[email protected]�


The unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of a controlled substance or the unlawful possession and unlawful use of alcohol is harmful, and is prohibited in and on the University of West Florida campus, the University’s owned or controlled property, or as part of any of its activities. No employee is to report to work or class, or any university activity, while under the influence of illegal drugs or alcohol. Violation of these policies by an employee will be reason for referral for prosecution consistent with local, State, and Federal law. Contractor shall promptly remove from the project any of its employees found to be in violation of this policy. Failure to do so may result in the termination of the contract and suspension of the contractor from future University projects/contracts at the sole discretion of the University of West Florida.

Health and Wellness Center – Building #960 January 2010 – Final Construction Documents University of West Florida – AE Project No. 0809-019

00300-1

SECTION 00300 - BID FORM 1. Submit bids in compliance with Document 00100 – Instructions to Bidders. Fill in blanks. The Owner

reserves the right to reject incomplete bid forms. 2. This Bidding document is not part of the Contract Documents, unless specifically referenced in the

Owner/Contractor Agreement. 3. Name and Address of Bidder:

4. The Bidder proposes to perform all of the Work required by the Contract Documents for the amount of: (Fill in amount in words and numbers.) A. Base Bid:

1. Health and Wellness Center building up to the 5 foot $ line, but including South Patio 100B.

2. Site Work $ Total Base Bid $

B. Bid Options: 1. Provide Painted Tube Steel Eyebrow Canopy at north Entry 100A. $

2. Extend brick veneer wall construction at Second Floor Patio 200G $ construction to match height of high west wall as shown in the Construction Documents.

3. Provide Painted Tube Steel Arbor at Second Floor Patio 200G. $

4. Provide Integrally Colored CIP Concrete at first floor south Patio 100B. $

5. Provide solid surface countertops at all areas specified as plastic laminate $ with wood edge.

6. Provide Premanufactured Metal Solar Sunshade by curtainwall $

manufacturer in locations indicated in drawings. 5. Bond Value per line 5 Section 00100: $ 6. By submitting this Bid Form, the Bidder certifies that he has visited the project site, is aware of existing

conditions which affect the work, and has reviewed the Contract Documents.

7. Signed and sealed (Enter date, Bidder’s signature and legal business address.)



1

DIVISION 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 00800 1.1 The Contractor shall become familiar and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances or

regulations controlling the action or operation of those engaged in the work, or affecting materials used, and operate in accordance therewith. The Contractor agrees that the requirements of such ordinances will be adhered to. Codes and legal acts which will affect the design and construction of a project include, but are not limited to: 1.1.1 The Florida Building Code, latest edition 1.1.2 NFPA 101 (Life Safety) 1.1.3 American National Standard Safety Code for:

i. Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks, (ANSI A 17.1 – 1971, including latest supplements)

ii. ANSI A117-1 – 1980, with latest changes for Handicapped Access 1.1.4 National Electric Code, latest edition 1.1.5 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, latest edition 1.1.6 GAISC (American Institute of Steel Construction), latest edition 1.1.7 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 1.1.8 Latest edition of NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE and only copper wire to be used 1.1.9 Underwriters’ Laboratories: Unless otherwise stipulated in the ITB and all

manufactured items and fabricated assemblies shall carry U.L. approval and reexamination listing where such has been established

1.1.10 Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) 1.1.11 Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) 1.1.12 Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 1.1.13 EIA/TIA Telecommunications Standards, Latest Edition 1.1.14 BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods, Latest Edition From The University of West Florida: 1.1.15 The University of West Florida Building Construction Standards

Section 00850 1.1 The Contractor shall hold harmless THE UNIVERSITY OF WEST FLORIDA and all of

its officers, agents and employees against any claims or liability arising from, or based upon the violation of any such laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations, orders or decrees, whether by the Contractor or the Contractor’s employees except where the instance of violation is constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications.

1.2 Should the Contractor find any discrepancy, omission, or violation of applicable codes, or

be in doubt as to the meaning of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall stop work in progress. If the work is affected by the particular discrepancy, omission or interpretation need, consult with the Owner’s representative (project manager) immediately.


2

1.3 All labor and work described in these specifications or shown on the drawings shall be executed in a thoroughly substantial and workmanlike manner and installed in accordance with the specifications, the highest trade standards, and the manufacturer’s recommendations, and by workers skilled in their trade.

1.4 The Contractor must verify quantities and measurements at the site and shall be

responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed for differences between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the drawings.

Section 00900 Temporary Facilities 1.1 Transportation Facilities

1.1.1 Provide adequate protection for curbs and sidewalks over which trucks and equipments pass to reach the job site.

1.2 Contractor’s Vehicles

1.2.1 All Contractor’s vehicles, vehicles belonging to employees of the Contractor, and all other vehicles entering upon the University’s property in performance of the work of the contract, are to use only agreed upon access route.

1.2.2 Prohibit such vehicles from parking on any street or other area of the University’s property except in the areas designed by the Project Manager. Absolutely no parking on grass anywhere on campus unless prior approval from the Project Manager is obtained.

1.2.3 Secure all required parking decals or hang tags as required by the University Police Department, Building 19 in the case where short periods of core campus parking is required. Projects including a pre-bid will provide all parking coordinating information at the pre-bid meeting. Coordination with the Project Manager is required to secure a location for commuter contracted employees.

1.3 Security

1.3.1 Access of all persons entering upon the University’s property in connection with the work to the actual site of the work will be coordinated with the Project Manager.

1.3.2 Restrict activities of employees to authorized areas. Employees shall not be allowed to mingle in student or public areas.

1.4 Utility Outages

1.4.1 Planned utility outages are occasionally required for repairs, maintenance, or construction. In order to avoid unexpected inconveniences, property damage, safety hazards, or loss of information or research, Contractor must notify the Project Manger at least one week in advance.

1.4.2 When the work is completed or when changes in the work schedule are foreseen, the Contractor must advise the Project Manager.

1.4.3 An unplanned utility outage should be reported immediately to the Project Manager.


3

Section 01100 1.1 PROJECT

1.1.1 Project Name: Health and Wellness Center-Building #960 1.1.2 Owner’s Name: University of West Florida

1.1.3 Architect’s Name: Hernandez Calhoun Design International

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The Base Bidwork will include: Bid Item 1: Will constitute all materials, plant, tools, labor and associated incidentals necessary to complete the construction of The Health and Wellness Center building up to the 5 foot line, but including South Patio 100B. Bid Item 2: Will constitute all materials, plant, tools, labor, and associated incidentals necessary to complete the construction of the site work including finished grading, all communications, data systems, all utility systems, and infrastructure, stormwater systems, parking lots, sidewalks, landscaping, seeding and sod (as defined), and site lighting in compliance with the contract documents. Bid Options will be taken on the following scopes of work; refer to Section 01230. Bid Option No. 1: Provide painted tube steel eyebrow canopy at north entry. Bid Option No. 2: Extend brick veneer wall construction at Second Floor Patio 200G construction

to match height of high west wall in base bid.

Bid Option No. 3: Provide painted tube steel arbor at Second Floor Patio. Bid Option No. 4: Provide integrally colored cip concrete at first floor South Patio 100B.

Bid Option No. 5: Provide solid surface countertops at all areas specified as plastic laminate with wood edge.

Bid Option No. 6: Provide premanufactured metal solar shades by curtainwall manufacturer in

locations indicated in drawings.

1.3 OWNER OCCUPANCY 1.3.1 Cooperate with UWF to minimize conflict and to facilitate UWF’s operations.

1.4 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.


4

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to Site Boundaries as indicated on Drawings CO-1 and CO-2.

2. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet beyond building perimeter; 10 feet beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches in diameter; 15 feet beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet

3. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy adjacent building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.


5

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the building is not permitted.

of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Section 01230 Bid Options 1.1 Schedule of Bid Options

1.1.1 Bid Option No.1: Provide painted tube steel eyebrow canopy at north entry.

1.1.2 Bid Option No. 2: Extend brick veneer wall construction at Second Floor Patio 200G construction

to match height of high west wall in base bid.

1.1.3 Bid Option No. 3: Provide painted tube steel arbor at Second Floor Patio.

1.1.4 Bid Option No. 4: Provide integrally colored cip concrete at first floor South Patio 100B.


6

1.1.5 Bid Option No. 5: Provide solid surface countertops at all areas specified as plastic laminate with wood edge.

1.1.6 Bid Option No. 5: Provide premanufactured metal solar shades by curtainwall manufacturer

in locations indicated in drawings. 1.2 Acceptance of Bid Option

1.2.1 Accepted alternatives will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.2.2 Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of

each alternative. 1.2.3 The drawings and specifications include additional information that describe the

Base Bid and Additive Alternate and Deductive Alternate work required. Section 01400 Quality Control and Testing 1.1 Section Include

1.1.1 Mock-ups. 1.1.2 Control of installation. 1.1.3 Tolerances 1.1.4 Manufacturers’ field services

1.2 Submittals

1.2.1 Design Data and Erection Drawings: Submit to the Architect as contract

administrator or to the Owner, for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

1.2.2 Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application by the manufacturer subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. i. Indicate materials or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 1.2.3 Manufacturer’s Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections,

submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner’s information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

2.1 Control of Installation

2.1.1 Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site

conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. 2.1.2 Comply with manufacturers’ instructions, including each step in sequence. 2.1.3 Should manufacturer’s instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Architect before proceeding.


7

2.1.4 Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

2.1.5 Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

2.1.6 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

2.1.7 Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

2.2 Mock-ups

2.2.1 Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in

the respective product specification sections. 2.2.2 Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage

devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. 2.2.3 Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining work. 2.2.4 Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product

specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

2.3 Tolerances

2.3.1 Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce

acceptable work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. 2.3.2 Comply with manufacturers’ and standard tolerances. Should manufacturers’

tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

2.3.3 Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

2.3.4 The contractor is responsible for all tests and inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, required by provisions of the Contract Documents, and other such tests and inspections specified in the scope of each project.

2.4 Manufacturers’ Field Services

2.4.1 When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product

suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, tests, adjust and balance of equipment, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

2.4.1 Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers’ written instructions.

2.5 Defect Assessment


8

2.5.1 Replace work or portions of the work not conforming to specified requirements. 2.5.2 If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the work,

the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. Section 01700 Execution Requirements 1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1 Pre-installation meetings 1.1.2 Cutting and patching 1.1.3 Cleaning and protection 1.1.4 Starting of systems and equipment 1.1.5 Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel

1.2 Project Conditions

1.2.1 Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

1.2.2 Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.3 Coordination

1.3.1 Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

1.3.2 Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

1.3.3 Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work, which are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

1.3.4 In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

1.3.5 Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections. 1.3.6 After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of

defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner’s activities.

2.1 Pre-Installation

2.1.1 When required and/or identified in individual sections, the architect will convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

2.1.2 Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.


9

2.1.3 Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. 2.1.4 The architect will prepare an agenda as prescribed by UWF and preside at meeting:

i. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. ii. Review coordination with related work.

2.2 Laying Out The Work 2.2.1 Verify locations of control points prior to starting work. 2.2.2 Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.

2.3 General Installation Requirements

2.3.1 Install products as specified in individual sections. 2.3.2 Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and

appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

2.3.3 Utility Locates Outside the Building Line: a. A/E drawings will show approximate locations. Within a 48-hour notice, UWF

Facilities Management in conjunction with local utilities, will assist the contractor with approximate layout of utility locations. Subsequently, the contractor will be responsible for precautionary hand digging until utility is exposed.

b. Existing utilities shall be protected by the Contractor. All damages incurred to marked or obvious utilities as a result of the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable code, at the Contractor’s expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner. All damaged utilities being repaired require a permit and inspection from the UWF Building Code Official. Contractor shall immediately notify Facilities Management Work Control Center at 857-6000 in the event of a utility break.

c. Contractor will be responsible to disconnect, remove, cap, continue service, or relocate all facility utilities distribution systems necessary to perform the scope of work within the contract document. Capping of any utility will be made as close to the main as possible following all applicable code requirements.

2.3.4 Utility Locates Inside the Building Envelope: a. Contractor will be responsible to disconnect, remove, cap, continue service, or

relocate all facility utilities distribution systems necessary to perform the scope of work within the contract document. Capping of any utility will be made as close to the main as possible following all applicable code requirements.

b. Existing utilities shall be protected by the Contractor. All damages incurred to marked or obvious utilities as a result of the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable code, at the Contractor’s expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner. All damaged utilities being repaired require a permit and inspection from the UWF Building Code Official. Contractor shall immediately notify Facilities Management Work Control Center at extension 857-6000 in the event of a utility break.

c. The Contractor will note all such work on as-built construction site drawings. d. The Contractor will notify the Owner when utilities have been located and the

area for demolition or construction has been established. A walk through will


10

be scheduled with the affected department representative to observe and voice concerns.

2.4 Cutting and Patching

2.4.1 Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.

2.4.2 Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

2.4.3 Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

2.4.4 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

2.4.5 Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

2.4.6 Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

2.4.7 At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material as an approved and tested assembly, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

2.5 Progress Cleaning

2.5.1 Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

2.5.2 Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

2.5.3 Broom clean once per week and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

2.5.4 Collect and remove all non-hazardous waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site once per week and dispose off-site.

2.5.5 Provide adequate storage of all items awaiting daily removal from the job site, observing requirements for fire protection and environmental protection.

2.5.6 If a dedicated parking area is assigned, the parking area must be free of debris after the completion of each work day.

2.6 Protection of Installed Work

2.6.1 Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

2.6.2 Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.


11

2.6.3 Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

2.7 Starting Systems

2.7.1 Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. 2.7.2 Notify Architect and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. 2.7.3 Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper

lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.

2.7.4 Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

2.7.5 Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. 2.7.6 Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel in

accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. 2.7.7 When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to

provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

2.7.8 Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

2.8 Demonstration and Instruction for Maintenance Staff

2.8.1 Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. Each session shall be no longer than three hours, not more than six hours of instruction per day and a maximum of sixteen total contact hours per system. The design firm will summarize by division and section numbers with title of the building system on one page within Division 1, General Requirements. All training required must be scheduled and completed as part of and prior to established date of Substantial Completion (D.O.S.).

2.8.2 Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel as follows: __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

2.8.3 Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner’s personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

2.9 Adjusting

2.9.1 Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.


12

2.9.2 Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Mechanical. Section 01711 Final Cleaning/Restoration of disturbed Areas 1.1 Execute final cleaning.

1.1.1 Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. Coordinate dates with Owner.

1.1.2 Clean new and/or existing interior glass surfaces. Remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

1.1.3 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

1.1.4 Replace filters of operating equipment. 1.1.5 Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 1.1.6 Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the

site. 1.1.7 All exterior areas disturbed by the construction of this project must be restored to

pre-construction condition. This includes any grassed areas disturbed by hulls, lifts or large equipment. Areas must be raked and sodded or plants replaced to restore landscaping to pre-construction condition.

Section 01730 Closeout Procedures 1.1 Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

1.1.1 Provide copies to Architect and Owner. 1.2 Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. 1.3 Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates prior to Substantial Completion and

comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas with one punch list of items to be corrected and produced by A/E Services and distributed.

1.4 Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. 1.5 Complete items of work determined by Architect’s final inspection. 1.6 Maintenance Service

1.6.1 Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the warranty period.

1.6.2 Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

1.6.3 Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

1.6.4 Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

Section 01780 Closeout Submittals


13

This Section of specifications is a supplement to the Bidding, Contractual and Special Conditions of the Project Manual – where a conflict between this specification Section 1780 and these Conditions occurs, the most stringent requirement takes precedent. 1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1 Project Record Documents, including electronic as-built drawings 1.1.2 Operation and Maintenance Data 1.1.3 Scheduled Owner Training for equipment and systems 1.1.4 Warranties

1.2 Related Sections 1.2.1 Conditions of the Contract: Performance bond and labor and material payment,

warranty, and correction of work. 1.2.2 Section 01300 – Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, shop

drawings, product data, and samples 1.2.3 Section 01700 – Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. 1.2.4 Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or work.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment with initial punch list enclosed.

1.3.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: i. Submit one copy of completed documents ten days prior to final inspection.

This copy will be reviewed and returned, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

ii. Submit one set of revised final documents in final form within ten days after final inspection.

1.3.3 Warranties and Final Waiver of Lein: i. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during

construction with Owner’s permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.

ii. Make all submittals prior to release of final Application for Payment. iii. For items of work for which acceptance is delayed beyond date of Substantial

Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

Part 2 Products - Not Used Part 3 Execution 3.1 Project Record Documents

3.1.1 Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work: i. Drawings, Project Manual and Shop Drawings. ii. Addenda. iii. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.


14

3.1.2 Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. 3.1.3 Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. 3.1.4 Record information concurrent with construction progress. 3.1.5 Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual

construction including: i. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. ii. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. iii. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. iv. Field changes of dimension and detail. v. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.1.6 Electronic As-built drawings: i. Minimum AutoCAD 2002 version ii. Electronic revisions in accordance to marked-up construction set noted above.

iii. If plans are x-referenced, bind all x-references so that there is one electronic file per drawing.

iv. Submit electronic as-builts on CD’s. 3.2 Operation and Maintenance Data for Equipment and Systems

3.2.1 For each item of equipment and each system: i. Description of unit or system, and component parts. ii. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. iii. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. iv. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

3.2.2 Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

3.2.3 Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balances, and checking instructions.

3.2.4 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 3.2.5 Include manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions. 3.2.6 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 3.2.7 Provide original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and

diagrams required for maintenance. 3.2.8 Include test and balancing reports. 3.2.9 Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

3.3.1 Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

3.3.2 Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.


15

3.3.3 Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

3.3.4 Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; with title of project; and subject matter of contents.

3.3.5 Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

3.3.6 Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or typewritten data on twenty-four pound paper. 3.3.7 Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text, fold

larger drawings to size of text pages. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of the Project Manual.

3.3.8 A total of 4 Manuals are required. 3.4 Warranties and Bonds

3.4.1 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner’s permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the date of Substantial Completion is determined.

3.4.2 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

3.4.3 List all sub-contractors, contact person and phone number. 3.4.4 Co-execute submittals when required. 3.4.5 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 3.4.6 Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with

durable plastic covers. 3.4.7 Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND

BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

3.4.8 Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

3.4.9 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS – NURSING PROGRAM RENOVATIONS

SOLICITATION # ______________ TIME OF COMPLETION The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be substantially completed no later than ___ calendar days after Notice to Proceed, and shall be finally completed no later than 45 days after Substantial Completion, subject to time extensions granted by Change Order. The time set forth for the completion of the Work is an essential element of the Contract. PROJECT SCHEDULE The project schedule must be updated bi-weekly. A copy of the updated schedule must be included with the pay application. Failure to submit updated schedule will be cause for rejection of the payment application. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES For each calendar day after durations indicated that the work is not substantially complete, liquidated damages in an amount not to exceed $1,000.00 per day will be deducted from any money due or that becomes due the Contractor. For each calendar day after durations indicated that the Work is not finally complete, liquidated damages in an amount not to exceed $1,000.00 per day will be deducted from any money due or that becomes due the Contractor. These liquidated damages are not assessed as a penalty but represent the Owner’s estimate of actual out-of-pocket expenses. Said liquidated damages shall be payable in addition to any excess expenses or costs payable by the Contractor to the Owner under the provisions of Article 10 of the General Conditions, and shall not preclude the recovery of damages to the Owner under other provisions of the Contract Documents. This provision for liquidated damages for delay shall in no manner affect the Owner’s right to terminate the Contract as provided in Article 10 of the General Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner’s exercise of the right to terminate shall not release the Contractor from an obligation to pay said liquidated damages. BIDDING DOCUMENTS If any portion of the bidding documents is in conflict with any other portion, the most stringent requirement will apply and will be complied with at no additional cost to the Owner.


011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Nursing Program Renovations, Building #37.

1. Project Location: University of West Florida Campus, Pensacola, Florida.

B. Owner: University of West Florida.

1. Owner's Representative: __________

C. Architect: Hernandez Calhoun Design International, 1120 E. Cervantes St. Pensacola, Florida. (850) 434-5142.

D. Contractor: TBD

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. __________________________________

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: ________________________________


011000 - 2

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas as indicated on Drawings CO-1 and CO-2.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy adjacent portions of the building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.


011000 - 3

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the building is not permitted.

of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ALTERNATES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost for each alternate is the net addition to from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Base Bid:


012300 - 2

1. Base Bid : __________________________

2. Alternates:

a. Alternate 1: ________________________



013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project Web site. 4. Project meetings.


1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.


013100 - 2

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.


013100 - 3

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.


013100 - 4

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.


013100 - 5

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. LEED requirements. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.


013100 - 6

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. LEED requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility problems. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities


013100 - 7

shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Status of LEED documentation. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.


013100 - 8


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Periodic construction photographs.


1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.


A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files within three days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file

metadata tag:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

C. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs.

1. Format: 8-by-10-inch

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information:

smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight, commercial-grade photographic paper; enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard three-ring binder.

a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.


013233 - 2

f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.

1.4 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: As needed to document LEED requirements.

E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points.

F. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum.


013233 - 3

1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.



013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.


013300 - 2

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1. Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.


013300 - 3

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.


013300 - 4

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. Six paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return

four copies.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: .

a. Six opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return four copies.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.


013300 - 5

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. Six paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return four copies.

E. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

F. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

G. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

H. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

I. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section.

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure


013300 - 6

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.


013300 - 7

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit six paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.


013300 - 8

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.


014000 - 2

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.


014000 - 3

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.


014000 - 4

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to Insert standard; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do

not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.


014000 - 5

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 02 through 33.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.


014000 - 6

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.


014000 - 7


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Sewer, Water, and Electric Power Service: Use charges are specified in Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary."


A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.


015000 - 2

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches

B. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:


015000 - 3

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-

3. Drinking water and private toilet.

square tack and marker boards.

4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of

. 20 fc

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

at desk height.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Contractor shall provide continuous pumped by-pass when performing work on existing sanitary sewer main such that continuous service is provided. Contractor shall coordinate sanitary sewer disruptions with the University Project Manager.


015000 - 4

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.


015000 - 5

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. b. Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:

1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 22-inch5. Full-size keyboard and mouse.

LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM.

6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista

Business. 8. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.

12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:


015000 - 6

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Execution."

D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

E. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.


015000 - 7

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Consider inserting specific removal requirements, as illustrated in first subparagraph below.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

EXECUTION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting Project Record Documents,

recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.


A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

D. Final Property Survey: Submit two copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.


017300 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.


017300 - 3

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.


017300 - 4

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.


017300 - 5

3.5 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.


1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work.


017419 - 2


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information:

1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in

. tons

5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in .

tons6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in

. tons

7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. .

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1, signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met.

H. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by USGBC. Waste management coordinator may also serve as LEED coordinator.

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate


017419 - 3

quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.


017419 - 4

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.


017419 - 5

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

B. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


017419 - 6

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation.

2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.


017700 - 2

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design

requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.


017700 - 3

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:


017700 - 4

a. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction

Manager, will return two copies.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

paper.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.


017700 - 5

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

b. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. c. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. d. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

e. Remove labels that are not permanent. f. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

g. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

h. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

i. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. j. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.


017700 - 6

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.

C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.


017823 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

C. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.


017823 - 3

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.


017823 - 4

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.


017823 - 5

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.


017823 - 6

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and


017823 - 7

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.



2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit three paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.


017839 - 2

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.


017839 - 3

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.


2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.



2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit three paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.


017839 - 2

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.


2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.


017839 - 3

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.


2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.


017900 - 2

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.


017900 - 3

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.


017900 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Architect.

C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.


017900 - 5

D. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.


Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 –65% Submittal University of West Florida

024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.


024119 - 2

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.


024119 - 3

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 –Construction Documents University of West Florida

05 40 00 1 of 5

SECTION 054000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing wall framing and furring.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research reports.


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 3. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 4. Craco Mfg., Inc. 5. Custom Stud Inc. 6. Design Shapes in Steel.


05 40 00 2 of 5

7. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 8. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 9. MarinoWARE. 10. MBA Building Supplies, Inc. 11. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 12. Olmar Supply, Inc. 13. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 14. SCAFCO Corporation. 15. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 16. State Building Products, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 19. Steel Structural Systems. 20. Steeler, Inc. 21. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 22. Telling Industries, LLC. 23. United Metal Products, Inc. 24. United Steel Manufacturing.


A. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade:

2. Minimum coating requirement for Structural Grade, Type H steel is G60 (Z180) or equivalent.

2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 2. Flange Width:

0.0428 inch

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and matching minimum base-metal thickness of steel studs.

1-5/8 inches

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.


05 40 00 3 of 5

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. d. MarinoWARE. e. SCAFCO Corporation. f. Steel Network, Inc. (The). g. Steeler, Inc.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20


05 40 00 4 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths.

D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

E. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

F. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus

and as follows:

1/8 inch

3.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.


05 40 00 5 of 5

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows but not more than 48 inches

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within

apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

12 inches

2. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



092900 1 of 3

SECTION 092900 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GYPSUM BOARD

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Textured finishes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples:

1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 20 percent.

B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

of Project site.

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2. National Gypsum Company.


092900 2 of 3

3. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: match existing2. Long Edges: Tapered.

.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

1. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 20 percent.

2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.

2. Texture: Orange Peel.


092900 3 of 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-

D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

1. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and areas not normally open to public view.

2. Level 4: For use where gypsum wall board will receive painted finishes.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

H. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



095123 1 of 3

SECTION 095123 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Product test reports.

B. Evaluation reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


095123 2 of 3

2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical tile ceilings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

C. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Classification: Type 3, Form 2, pattern C, D.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: 0.82.

E. NRC: 0.55, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795.

F. CAC: 33.

G. AC: 180.

H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-in.

I. Thickness: 5/8 inch

J. Modular Size: 24 x 24 inches.

.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.


095123 3 of 3

C. Access: Upward.

D. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

C. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.



096513 1 of 4

SECTION 096513 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches


long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE (RB-1)

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


096513 2 of 4

a. Flexco, Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Johnsonite. d. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe) at vinyl floors and Straight (flat or toeless) at carpet areas.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch

D. Height:

.

4 inches

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: Matte.

I. Colors and Patterns: (RB-1) See specification Section 099150 for all color designations.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flexco, Inc. b. Johnsonite. c. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Description: Nosing for carpet and Nosing for resilient floor covering.

C. Material: Vinyl.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.

E. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.


096513 3 of 4

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. No single length shall be less than 24”.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.


096513 4 of 4

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of all carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.


1998 Edition

Guide Specification / CSI Manu-Spec® Document Section 096516: Vinyl Sheet Page 1 06/02/11

SECTION 096516 RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Resilient Vinyl Sheet Flooring 1. Eternal [Wood] [Stone] [Marble] [Classic] [Wood Decibel] [Step] [Step SR] flooring, adhesive

installation. 2. Eternal [Wood] [Stone] [Marble] [Classic] [Wood Decibel] [Step] [Step SR] flooring, adhesive

and heat welded seams installation. 3. Eternal [Wood] [Stone] [Marble] [Classic] [Wood Decibel] [Step] [Step SR] flooring, adhesive

and flash coved base installation. 4. Resilient Base. 5. Resilient Transition Accessories.

Specifier Note: Revise paragraph below to suit project requirements. Add section numbers and titles per CSI MasterFormat and specifier's practice.

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include: 1. Concrete: Refer to Division 3 Concrete Sections for cast-in-place concrete, concrete toppings,

and cementitious underlayments. 2. Wood Subflooring: Refer to Division 6 Carpentry Section for wood subflooring and wood

underlayment. 3. Resilient Flooring Accessories: Refer to Division 9 Finishes Sections for resilient wall bases,

reducer strips, metal edge strips and other resilient flooring accessories. 4. Expansion Joint Covers: Refer to Division 10 Specialties Section for expansion joint covers to

be used with resilient flooring.

Specifier Note: Article below may be omitted when specifying manufacturer's proprietary products and recommended installation. Retain Reference Article when specifying products and installation by an industry reference standard. If retained, list standard(s) referenced in this section. Indicate issuing authority name, acronym, standard designation and title. Establish policy for indicating edition date of standard referenced. "Conditions of the Contract" or Division 1 References Section may establish the edition date of standards. This article does not require compliance with standard, but is merely a listing of references used. Article below should list only those industry standards referenced in this section.

1998 Edition


1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM F 1303 Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. 2. ASTM F 1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete

Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 3. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor

Slabs Using in situ Probes 4. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 5. ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 6. ASTM F 1482 Standard Practice for Installation and Preparation of Panel Type

Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring. 7. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems

Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 8. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by

Solid Materials. 9. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 10. ASTM E 492 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of lmpact Sound

Transmission through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine. 11. ASTM E 989 Standard Classification for Determination of lmpact lnsulation Class (llC).

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant

Heat Energy Source. 2. NFPA 258 Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

C. International Standards and Training Alliance (INSTALL): 1. INSTALL Resilient Certification.

Specifier Note: Article below should be restricted to statements describing design or performance requirements and functional (not dimensional) tolerances of a complete system. Limit descriptions to composite and operational properties to extent necessary to link multiple components of a system, and to interface with other systems.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide flooring which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

Specifier Note: Article below includes submittal of relevant data to be furnished by Contractor either before, during, or after construction. Coordinate this article with Architect's and Contractor's duties and responsibilities in "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA product sheet, for specified products.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.

D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certification of compliance: Letter of compliance signed by manufacturer certifying materials

comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with Part 3 Field Quality Requirements Article herein. Retain or delete as applicable.

3. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Manufacturer's field reports specified herein.

1998 Edition


F. Sustainable Submittals 1. Product data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2 for products having recycled content,

including documentation indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Product data for Credit MR6 for products having rapidly renewable content, including documentation indicating percentages by weight of rapidly renewable content as required by Division 01. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having Rapidly Renewable content.

3. Product data for Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content as required by Division 01.

4. Confirm that each product complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. If a product specified has not been tested as noted, provide a substitution to the Architect for review and approval of an equal product meeting noted California Department of Health standard.

5. Product data and certification of SMART sustainable product certification pursuant to LEED innovation credit.

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in

accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.

Specifier Note: Article below should include prerequisites, standards, limitations, and criteria which establish an overall level of quality for products and workmanship for this section. Coordinate below article with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. 1. Engage installer certified as a [Forbo “Associate Mechanic” or INSTALL certified Resilient

Installer (standard installations)] [Forbo "Master Mechanic" (complex installations)].

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below to suit project requirements; otherwise delete paragraph below.

2. Certificate: Submit certificate indicating installer qualification.

Specifier Note: Paragraph below should list obligations for compliance with specific code requirements particular to this section. General statements to comply with a particular code are typically addressed in "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Regulatory Requirements Section. Repetitive statements should be avoided.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient linoleum sheet flooring with the following fire

performance characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance with ASTM method indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 Rating per NFPA 253 (ASTM E 648) (0.45 watts/cm² or

greater). b. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per NFPA 258 (ASTM E 662).

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below for erected assemblies (either on-site or off-site) required for review of construction, coordination of work of several sections, testing, or observation of operation. Mock-ups, when accepted or approved, establish standards by which work will be judged. Coordinate below with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.

C. Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standard. Comply with Division 1 Quality Control (Mock-Up Requirements) Section.

1998 Edition


Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below to specify mock-up requirements.

1. Mock-Up Size: [Specify mock-up size.] 2. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and

legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required. 3. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's approval.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with Division 1 Project Management And Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.

D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.

E. Pre-Installation Testing: Conduct pre-installation testing as follows: [Specify testing (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc).]

Specifier Note: Article below should include special and unique requirements. Coordinate article below with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Material should be stored in areas that are fully enclosed and weathertight. The permanent

HVAC should be fully operational, controlled and set at a minimum of 68º F (20º C) for at least 48 hours prior to the installation.


A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas to receive flooring should be clean, fully enclosed and weathertight. The permanent HVAC must be fully operational, controlled and set at a minimum of 68o F (20o

B. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.

C) for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after the installation. The flooring material should be conditioned in the same manner for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. Areas to receive flooring shall be adequately lighted to allow for proper inspection of the substrate, installation and seaming of the flooring, and for final inspection.

1. Temperature Conditions: 68o F (20o

C. Existing Conditions: [Specify existing conditions affecting product use and installation.]

C) for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after the installation.

D. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

Specifier Note: Article below is a combination of two CSI SectionFormat article titles.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Finishing Operations: Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting and ceiling operations, have been completed.

B. Concrete Curing: Do not install flooring over concrete substrates until substrates have cured and are dry to bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond, moisture test, and pH test.

1. [Owner assigned responsibility.]

2. [Flooring Contractor assigned to report responsibility back to owner/architect.]

1998 Edition


Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with "Conditions of the Contract" and with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Warranty) Section. Below warranty article assumes the use of The American Institute of Architects document A201 "Conditions of the Contract for Construction." If other "Conditions" are used for the project, revise article below accordingly.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

Specifier Note: Coordinate paragraph below with manufacturer's warranty requirements.

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.

Specifier Note: Revise paragraph below specifying size and percentage as required for project.

1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to 5% of amount installed. 2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and

protection of extra materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Specifier Note: Retain article below for proprietary method specification. Add product attributes, performance characteristics, material standards, and descriptions as applicable. Use of such phrases as "Equal" or "Approved Equal," or similar phrases may cause ambiguity in specifications. Such phrases require verification (procedural, legal, and regulatory) and assignment of responsibility for determining "Equal" products.

2.01 RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING [PRODUCT TYPE]

A. Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring, Inc.

Specifier Note: Paragraph below is an addition to CSI SectionFormat and a supplement to MANU-SPEC®

1. Contact: 8 Maplewood Dr., Humboldt Industrial Park, P.O. Box 667, Hazleton, PA 18202; Telephone +800 842 7839 or +570 459 0771; Fax + 570 450 0258

. Retain or delete paragraph below per project requirements and specifier's practice.


2. Representative Contact: [Specify representative contact information.]


B. Proprietary Product(s): Eternal [Wood] [Stone] [Marble] [Classic] Vinyl Sheet and Vinyl Adhesive. 1. Description: Highly compressed homogeneous vinyl wear layer with a high performance

urethane top coat. A glass fiber interlayer to ensure dimensional stability and a calendared CDF backing support the wearlayer.

2. Width: 2 Meters (79") 3. Length: 25 Meters (82 Linear Feet) 4. Gauge: 2.0mm (0.080”) 5. Pattern and Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns and

colors.] 6. Adhesive: Forbo Flooring, Inc., V 885 Adhesive 7. Heat Welding Rod: Forbo Flooring, Inc., Eternal color-matched welding rod.

1998 Edition


C. Proprietary Product(s): Eternal Wood Decibel Vinyl Sheet and Vinyl Adhesive. 1. Description: Highly compressed homogeneous vinyl wear layer with a high performance

urethane top coat. A glass fiber interlayer to ensure dimensional stability and a calendared CDF backing with an applied acoustic comfort layer support the wearlayer.

2. Width: 2 Meters (79") 3. Length: 20 Meters (66 Linear Feet) 4. Gauge: 3.4mm (0.134”) 5. Backing: Acoustic foam 6. Pattern and Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns and


D. Proprietary Product(s): Eternal [Step] [Step SR] Vinyl Sheet and Vinyl Adhesive. 1. Description: Homogeneous and non-layered vinyl wearing surface that is either smooth

(slightly embossed) or studded. The wearing surface, comprised of a high percentage of binder, colorfast pigments, transparent PVC chips and carborundum granules throughout, is supported by a polyglass interlayer to ensure dimensional stability. [Eternal Step®

2. Width: 2 Meters (79")

SR has a large quantity of aluminum oxide and carborundum chips that provide a greater degree of slip resistance than standard project vinyl flooring.]

3. Length: 25 Meters (82 Linear Feet) 4. Gauge: 2.0mm (0.080”) 5. Pattern and Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns and



E. Product Criteria Forms: Refer to Product Criteria Forms as an attachment to this section.


1. Product Forms: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this section.

Specifier Note: Edit article below to suit project requirements. If substitutions are permitted, edit text below. Add text to refer to Division 1 Project Requirements (Product Substitutions Procedures) Section.

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

Specifier Note: Add article below for alternates required for project; state work covered. Coordinate with Part 1 General Summary Article herein, applicable Division 1 Sections, and other Bid and Contract Documents.

2.03 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Related Materials: Refer to other sections for related materials as follows: 1. Underlayment and Patching Compound: Refer to Division 3 Concrete Sections for portland

cement based underlayments and patching compounds. 2. Resilient Flooring Accessories: Refer to Division 9 Finishes Sections for resilient flooring

accessories. 3. Expansion Joint Covers: Refer to other specification section for expansion joint covers to be

used with resilient flooring.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY

A. Source Quality: Obtain flooring product materials from a single manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

1998 Edition


Specifier Note: Article below is an addition to the CSI SectionFormat and a supplement to MANU-SPEC®

3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

. Revise article below to suit project requirements and specifier's practice.

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.).

B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installation. Material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation.

B. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Prepare floor substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Floor Substrate: Floors shall be sound, smooth, flat, permanently dry, clean, and free of all

foreign materials including, but not limited to, dust, paint, grease, oils, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue.

3. Concrete Floor Substrate: Concrete floor substrate shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Refer to Division 3 Concrete sections for patching and repairing crack materials, and leveling compounds with portland cement based compounds. a. Reference Standard: Comply with ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete

Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring

C. Concrete Moisture Testing: Conduct moisture tests on all

D. Concrete pH Test: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of the age or grade level. If the pH is greater than 11, it must be neutralized prior to beginning the installation.

concrete floors regardless of the age, grade level or the presence of existing flooring. Conduct calcium chloride tests in accordance with ASTM F 1869. Measure the internal relative humidity of the concrete slab in accordance with ASTM F 2170. One test of each type should be conducted for every 1,000 square feet of flooring (minimum of 3). The tests should be conducted around the perimeter of the room, at columns, and anywhere moisture may be evident. Concrete moisture vapor emissions must not exceed 8.0 lbs. per 1,000 square feet in 24 hours when using Forbo V 885 adhesive. Concrete internal relative humidity must not exceed 85% when using Forbo V 885 adhesive. A diagram of the area showing the location and results of each test should be submitted to the Architect, General Contractor or End User. If the test results exceed these limitations, the installation must not proceed until the problem has been corrected.

E. Wood Subfloors: Wood floors should be double construction with a minimum total thickness of 1 inch. Wood floors must be rigid, free from movement and have at least 18" of well-ventilated air space below. Forbo floor coverings should not be installed over wooden subfloors built on sleepers over on or below grade concrete floors without first making sure that adequate precautions have been taken to ensure the structural integrity of the system, and to prevent moisture migration from the concrete slab. 1. Refer to Division 6 Carpentry sections for wood subfloor construction. 2. Reference Standard: Comply with ASTM F 1482 Standard Practice for Installation and

Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to Receive Resilient Flooring

1998 Edition


Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with manufacturer's recommended installation details and requirements.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Adhesive Flooring Installation: Cut required length of sheet vinyl flooring from roll, allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at either end. Layout and position sheet flooring so that any seams will fall at least 6 inches from underlayment joints or saw cuts in concrete substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of vertical surfaces, including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring into wet adhesive and roll with a 100 pound roller. Install sheet flooring square with room axis. 1. [Adhesive, Seamless Flooring Installation: Rout out seams and heat weld together with

complementary colored heat welding rod of complimentary composition in accordance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations.]

2. Adhesive Flooring and Flash Coved Base Installation: Extend flooring up the wall in a flash-coved method to a height of [4] [6] inches ([102] [152] mm), as indicated.

3. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific adhesive. Spread at a rate of approximately 200 ft2

B. Installation Techniques:

/gallon, as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

1. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of finished flooring, install flooring before these items are installed.

2. Scribe, cut, fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and built-in furniture, including pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, nosings, and cabinets.

3. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 4. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within

finish floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers.

5. Do not install resilient flooring over expansion joints. Use expansion joint covers manufactured for use with resilient flooring. Refer to other specification sections for expansion joint covers.

6. Adhere resilient flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed installation. a. Use adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with flooring manufacturer’s

recommendations, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

7. Roll resilient flooring as required by resilient flooring manufacturer.

C. Finish Flooring Patterns: As selected by Architect.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Sections.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Specifier Note: Edit paragraph below. Establish number and duration of periodic site visits with Owner and manufacturer, and specify below. Consult with manufacturer for services required. Coordinate paragraph below with Division 1 Quality Assurance Section and Part 1 Quality Assurance Submittals herein. Delete if manufacturer's field service not required.

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with at least 72 hours notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Site Visits: [Specify number and duration of periodic site visits.]

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Execution Requirements (Cleaning) Section.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended

by floor manufacturer. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor after installation. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.

1998 Edition


4. Damp mop flooring to remove black marks and soil.

Specifier Note: Coordinate article below with Division 1 Execution Requirements Section.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.

Specifier Note: Add or delete article below to suit project requirements.

3.08 INITIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

A. General: Include in Contract Sum Amount cost for initial maintenance procedures, and execute procedures after flooring installation as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Initial maintenance "Starter Kit" supplied by manufacturer. Initial maintenance to be conducted by flooring contractor.

Specifier Note: Retain article below to suit project requirements. CSI PageFormat allows for Schedules, Forms, and Tables to be located at the end of a section. Article may be used to described specific criteria requirements of similar products or equipment.

3.09 SCHEDULES AND (PRODUCT CRITERIA) FORMS

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below to suit project requirements. Reference a schedule or include a schedule as an attachment which indicates where to locate products and equipment.

A. Schedules: [Specify reference to applicable schedules.]

Specifier Note: Retain paragraph below to suit project requirements. Include forms as an attachment which indicates product criteria.

B. Product Criteria Forms Attachments: Refer to Product Criteria Form(s) [No.] of [No.], dated [specify date], attached herewith.

END OF SECTION

Manufacturer's Obligatory Disclaimer Statement (For Electronic Media; Not Print Media)


099123 1 of 6

SECTION 099123 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

INTERIOR PAINTING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples: 12” x 12” For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat on designated substrates.

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


099123 2 of 6

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal.


of each material and color applied.

A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Coronado Paint. 3. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 4. ICI Paints. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 7. Or other approved equal.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.


099123 3 of 6

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

C. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.

D. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.

E. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.

F. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: MPI #79.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143.

B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144.


099123 4 of 6

C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.

2.6 FLOOR COATINGS

A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.


099123 5 of 6

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System:

a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.


a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.


099123 6 of 6

D. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, and doors.

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

2. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.


a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, Satin, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #53.


Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 –Construction Documents University of West Florida – AE Project No. _________

101400 - 1

SECTION 101400 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SIGNAGE

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Plaques. 2. Panel signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


101400 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209

C. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze).

, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.

D. Bronze Plate: ASTM B 36/B 36M.

E. Steel:

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.

2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316], stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

3. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A 529/A 529M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, 42,000-psi

4. For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smooth surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

minimum yield strength.

F. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels with a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi

G. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

when tested according to ASTM D 790.

H. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating:

1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in.2. Tensile Strength:

per ASTM D 256, Method A. 9000 lbf/sq. in.

3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: per ASTM D 638.

340,000 lbf/sq. in.4. Heat Deflection:

per ASTM D 790. 265 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in.

5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044.

per ASTM D 648.

I. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications.


101400 - 3

2.2 PLAQUES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 2. A. R. K. Ramos. 3. Gemini Incorporated. 4. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 5. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 6. Mills Manufacturing Company. 7. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 8. Southwell Company (The).

B. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects, as follows:

1. Plaque Material: Bronze. 2. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture. 3. Border Style: Projected bevel. 4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.

2.3 PANEL SIGNS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 3. Allen Industries Architectural Signage 4. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 5. APCO Graphics, Inc. 6. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 7. Best Sign Systems Inc. 8. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 9. Fossil Industries, Inc. 10. Gemini Incorporated. 11. Grimco, Inc. 12. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 13. InPro Corporation 14. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 15. Mills Manufacturing Company. 16. Mohawk Sign Systems. 17. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 18. Seton Identification Products. 19. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 20. Supersine Company (The)

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:


101400 - 4

1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.050 inch] [0.080 inch2. Laminated, Aluminum Faced Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick. 0.020-inch-] <Insert dimension> thick aluminum

sheet laminated to each side of [0.197-inch-] [0.394-inch-

3. Laminated, Polycarbonate Faced Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick, [corrugated] [phenolic] [acrylic] backing[ with painted edges].

0.060-inch-] <Insert dimension> thick, polycarbonate face sheet laminated to each side of [0.197-inch-] [0.394-inch-

4. Acrylic Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick phenolic backing.

0.060 inch] [0.080 inch5. PVC Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick. 0.060-inch-] [0.080-inch-

6. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate:

] <Insert dimension> thick, extruded, high-impact PVC plastic [in color to match face color] [with painted finish].

0.048 inch7. Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet: Provide light-sensitive, water-wash photopolymer

face layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet with overall, face layer, and base-layer thicknesses, respectively, of [

thick.

0.120, 0.040, and 0.080 inch] [0.160, 0.040, and 0.120 inch

8. Laminated Sheet: High-pressure engraved stock with[contrasting color] face laminated to acrylic core [in finishes and color combinations indicated] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

].

9. Laminated, Etched Photopolymer: Raised graphics[ with Braille] 1/32 inch

10. Laminated, Sandblasted Polymer: Raised graphics[ with Braille]

above surface with contrasting colors [in finishes and color combinations indicated] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] and laminated to acrylic back.

1/32 inch

11. Edge Condition: [Square cut] [Beveled] [Bullnose].

above surface with contrasting colors [in finishes and color combinations indicated] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] and laminated to acrylic back.

12. Corner Condition: [Square] [Rounded to radius indicated]. 13. Mounting: [Framed] [Unframed] [As indicated].

a. [Wall] [Ceiling] [Projection] mounted with [concealed anchors] [magnetic tape] [two-face tape].

b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.

14. Color: [As indicated] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.

15. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch

C. Exterior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus

above surface with contrasting colors.

1/16 inch

1. Aluminum Sheet: [

measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

0.050 inch] [0.080 inch2. Laminated, Aluminum Faced Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick. 0.020-inch-] <Insert dimension> thick aluminum

sheet laminated to each side of [0.197-inch-] [0.394-inch-

3. Acrylic Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick, [corrugated] [phenolic] [acrylic] backing[ with painted edges].

0.060 inch] [0.080 inch4. Fiberglass Sheet: [

] <Insert dimension> thick. 0.090-inch-] [0.125-inch-

5. Edge Condition: [Square cut] [Beveled] [Bullnose]. ] <Insert dimension> thick sheet.

6. Corner Condition: [Square] [Rounded to radius indicated]. 7. Mounting: [Framed] [Unframed] [As indicated].


101400 - 5

a. [Wall] [Soffit] [Projection] mounted. b. Manufacturer's standard[ noncorroding] anchors for substrates encountered.


D. Laminated [Interior] [Exterior] Signs: Solid phenolic panel core with graphic image covered with thermosetting resin face layer.

1. Surface Finish: [Mat] [Beaded] [Gloss] [UV resistant, outdoor]. 2. Edge Condition: [Square cut] [Beveled] [Bullnose]. 3. Corner Condition: [Square] [Rounded to radius indicated]. 4. Thickness: [1/8 inch] [1/4 inch

E. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory paint brackets in color matching background color of panel sign .

] <Insert dimension>.

F. Panel Sign Frames:

1. PVC Frames: Extruded, high-impact PVC plastic.

a. Color: [As indicated] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match face color] <Insert color>.

b. Depth: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. c. Profile: [Square] [Beveled] [Rounded]. d. Corner Condition: [Square] [Rounded to radius indicated]. e. Mounting: As indicated.

1) [Wall] [Ceiling] [Projection] mounted with [concealed anchors] [magnetic tape] [two-face tape].

2) Manufacturer's standard[ noncorroding] anchors for substrates encountered.

2. Extruded-Aluminum Frames: Mitered [with concealed anchors] [and welded].

a. Color: [As indicated] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.

b. Depth: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. c. Profile: [Square] [Beveled] [Rounded]. d. Corner Condition: [Square] [Rounded to radius indicated]. e. Mounting: As indicated.



3. Metal Frames:

a. Bronze Plate: Not less than 0.032 inchb. Brass Plate: Not less than

thick. 0.032 inch thick.


101400 - 6

c. Steel Sheet: Painted, not less than 0.050 inch thick for face and 0.031 inch

1) Color: [As indicated] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.

thick for returns.

d. Stainless-Steel Sheet: Not less than 0.050 inch thick for face and 0.031 inch

e. Depth: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>.

thick for returns.

f. Corner Condition: [Square] [Rounded to radius indicated]. g. Mounting: As indicated.



G. Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of [slide-in inserts] [transparent covers with paper inserts printed by Owner] [changeable panel inserts for use in fixed frames] <Insert description>.

1. Furnish insert material and software for creating text and symbols for [PC-Windows] [Macintosh] computers for Owner production of paper inserts.

2. Furnish insert material cut-to-size for changeable message insert.

H. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.

1. Panel Material: [Opaque acrylic sheet] [Photopolymer] [Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied].

2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch

I. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.

.

1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply.

2. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel. 3. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. 4. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply opaque

background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.

J. Subsurface Copy: Apply minimum 4-mil-

K. Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

thick vinyl copy to back face of clear acrylic sheet forming panel face to produce precisely formed opaque image. Image shall be free of rough edges.


101400 - 7

L. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils

1. Panel Material: [Opaque acrylic sheet] [Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied].

with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to [exposed face of panel sign] [glass] [doors] [wall surfaces] <Insert substrate>.

M. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy [and] [background] [and frame] colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for [three] [five] years for application intended.


2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a [satin (directionally textured)] [polished (buffed)] [nonspecular as fabricated] mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.

B. Color Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, in [light bronze] [medium bronze] [dark bronze] [gold] [black] applied over a [satin (directionally textured)] [polished (buffed)] [nonspecular as fabricated] mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as


101400 - 8

specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

, medium gloss.

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

B. Factory Priming for Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils

2.8 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

.

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy [and] [background] [and frame] colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for [three] [five] years for application intended.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.


101400 - 9

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered

surfaces. 5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch-

6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.

7. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.

C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for type of wall surface indicated.

1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement.


Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 –Construction Documents University of West Florida _

CUBICLES 102123 - 1

SECTION 102123 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CUBICLES

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Curtain tracks and carriers. 2. Curtains.



B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers, anchorage details, and accessories.

C. Samples: For each type of curtain.

D. Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Furnish extra materials described below.

1. Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 10 units. 2. Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than two

units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:

1. Launderable to a temperature of not less than 160 deg F2. Flame resistant and identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when tested by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.


CUBICLES 102123 - 2

2.2 CURTAIN AND SUPPORT-SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS


1. ADC Hospital Equipment; Division of Automatic Devices Company. 2. Alderman Acres Mfg, Inc. 3. Barjan Manufacturing Ltd. 4. Catalina Curtain Company. 5. Coldraco, Inc. 6. Covoc Corporation. 7. K. N. Crowder Manufacturing, Inc. 8. C/S General Cubicle. 9. Cubicle Curtain Factory, Inc. 10. Diamond Drapery Co. 11. Erwin and Associates, Inc. 12. Hospi-Tel Manufacturing Co. 13. Imperial Fastener Company, Inc. 14. InPro Corporation. 15. A. R. Nelson Co. 16. Pryor Products. 17. Salsbury Industries. 18. Silent Gliss USA Inc. 19. Standard Textile Company, Inc. 20. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.

2.3 CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high

1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated,

; with manufacturer's standard wall thickness.

12-inch-2. Finish: Clear anodized

radius bends.

B. PVC Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 15/16 inch high

1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated,

.

12-inch-

C. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate from same material and with same finish as track.

radius bends.

D. Curtain Carriers: Two nylon rollers and nylon axle with chrome-plated steel hook.

E. Breakaway Curtain Carriers: One-piece nylon or Velcro breakaway curtain carriers designed to allow curtains to detach from tracks with a pulling force of no more than 5 lbf

F. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.

.

G. Concealed Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized.


CUBICLES 102123 - 3

2.4 CURTAINS

A. Cubicle Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester, inherently and permanently flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. INVISTA; Avora FR. b. Trevira, R-M Schulz Consulting, Inc.; Trevira CS.

2. Pattern: <Insert manufacturer's style name>. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Curtain Grommets: Nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches

C. Mesh Top: Not less than

o.c.; machined into top hem.

20-inch-

D. Beaded-Chain Curtain Drop:

high mesh top of No. 50 nylon mesh.

6 inches

E. Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination.

long; nickel-plated steel with aluminum hook.

F. Fabricate curtains as follows:

1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent added fullness, but not less than 12 inches

2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top, and minus clearance above the finished floor as follows:

added fullness.

a. Cubicle Curtains: 12 inches

PART 3 - EXECUTION

.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Up to 20 feet

1. Curtain Track Mounting: Suspended

in length, provide track fabricated from single continuous length.

2. IV Track Mounting: Surface.

C. Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Fasten tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Center fasteners in track to ensure unencumbered carrier operation.

D. Suspended-Track Mounting: Install track with manufacturer's standard tubular aluminum suspended supports at intervals and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Fasten


CUBICLES 102123 - 4

supports to structure. Provide supports at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Secure ends of track to wall with flanged fittings or brackets.

E. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining sleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.

F. Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch

G. Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback.

spacing along full length of curtain plus an additional carrier.



102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Corner guards.


A. Structural Performance: Provide handrails capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft.2. Concentrated load of

applied in any direction. 200 lbf

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. applied in any direction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches

E. Material certificates.

long.

F. Material test reports.

G. Maintenance data.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


102600 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 30.2 ft.-lbs/inch of thickness of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

for Alloy 6063-T5.


102600 - 3

2.2 CORNER GUARDS (CP-1)

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide IPC Door

and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. b. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. c. Balco, Inc. d. Construction Specialties, Inc. e. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. f. Musson Rubber Company. g. Pawling Corporation. h. Tepromark International, Inc. i. WallGuard.com.

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.080 inch wall thickness; in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Color and Texture: See Specification Section 099150 for all color designations.

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.070 inches 4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.

thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum

retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches

c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams. .


102600 - 4

B. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

C. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.


Nursing Program Renovations – Building #37 January 2014 –65% Submittal


COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00-Page 1 of 7

SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

A. The Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions, and Provisions of Division 1 apply to

this Section and all subsequent Division-22 Plumbing Sections in this project manual.

1.2 Summary Of Work

A. Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing piping, valves, equipment and acces-

sories for plumbing systems.

B. The Work shall provide a complete plumbing system as indicated or reasonably implied

within these Specifications, the accompanying Drawings, and applicable state and local

codes, in acceptable working order, including labor and materials, equipment and services

necessary for and incidental to manufacture, delivery, and installation.

C. Miscellaneous Work Included:

1. Excavation and backfill for underground work within building.

2. Cutting and patching, including that required to install equipment in existing struc-

tures and to uncover or replace defective, nonconforming, or ill-timed work. Refer to

Division-1 section "Cutting and Patching".

3. Demolition and legal removal of existing Division-22 equipment and fixtures, except

as noted otherwise.

4. Structural steel supports, platforms, hangers, and brackets for plumbing equipment,

except as specifically noted as being furnished by other trades.

5.

1.3 Definitions

A. “Contractor” or “Plumbing Contractor”, in the context of Division-22 Specifications, shall

indicate the party who is an installer of Division-22 equipment and materials, notwithstand-

ing any contractual division of the Work.

B. “Engineer”, in the context of Division-22 Specifications, shall indicate the party responsible

for the design and/or administration of the Work described in Division-22 documents and re-

lated Drawings.

1.4 Quality Assurance

A. Provide pipe, valves, and fittings meeting applicable ANSI/ASTM and NSF standards.




B. All piping shall be new and factory marked for materials of construction.

C. Codes and Standards

1. Various generally recognized codes and standards are referenced in these Specifica-

tions. Reference to these codes and standards shall be understood to mean the latest

published edition.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute

ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials

AWWA - American Water Works Association

FM - Factory Mutual

FPC - Florida Plumbing Code

IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

NEC - National Electrical Code

NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association

NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NSF - National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute

UL - Underwriters' Laboratories

2. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to conform to these codes and stand-

ards. If any plumbing installer becomes aware of a conflict, he shall immediately noti-

fy the Engineer and await instructions on how to proceed. Work installed knowingly

in non-conformance shall be removed and reinstalled properly without additional cost

to the Owner.

D. Inspection of Plans

1. Thoroughly inspect the Architectural Plans and Specifications for class of building

construction in general, kinds of floors, walls, roof, ceilings, etc. Examine other me-

chanical plans to become familiar with work of other mechanical trades and aware of

specific areas requiring coordination between trades. Check over measurements of

equipment furnished with spaces provided for on Plans and be responsible for equip-

ment fitting into spaces and into work of other trades. Report to the Engineer immedi-

ately in writing advising of any equipment that will not so fit and await his decision be-

fore proceeding.

2. Plans show amount, kind, and approximate location of fixtures, piping, and equipment

required. Plumbing plans are diagrammatic in nature; should it be necessary to make

minor and reasonable changes in routing or location, such changes shall be made at no

additional cost to the Owner.

E. Protection of Plumbing Systems




1. Take special care to protect equipment furnished in connection with this Work and

parts thereof in such manner as may be necessary or directed. Protection shall include

covers, crating, sheds or other means to prevent dirt, grit, plaster or other foreign sub-

stances from entering working parts of fixtures or equipment. Keep open ends of pipes

closed while in storage or during progress of the installation.

2. Touch up all paint surfaces damaged during construction or in transit from factory to

job site, except items to be finish painted at the job site.

F. Supervision and Coordination

1. Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish any information necessary to permit

the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interfer-

ence or delay.

G. Conflicts

1. Conflicts between the locations of equipment furnished by several trades which arise

during the performance of the work shall be settled at the jobsite by the trades involved

insofar as possible. In the event that such conflicts cannot be settled rapidly and ami-

cably between the affected trades, with work proceeding expeditiously, then the Engi-

neer shall decide which work is to be relocated and his judgment shall be final and

binding.

2. In general, the order of precedence of equipment in case of conflicts or interferences is:

a. Lighting Fixtures

b. Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment

c. HVAC Ductwork

d. Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment

e. Electrical Raceways and Equipment

f. Low Voltage Equipment

1.5 General Completion

A. Observe provisions of Division-1 "Project Closeout Requirements" Section.

B. After the completion of all installations, thoroughly clean all fixtures and equipment to re-

move oil, dirt, paint, shipping labels, and other foreign matter. Touch up damaged factory

finishes to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. Flush out water supplies to fixtures after removing aerators from faucets and cleaning.

D. Legally remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated from construction from the premises.




E. Furnish the Owner with spare equipment as specified, record drawings, and Maintenance

Manuals.

1.6 Submittals

A. Certified Submittal Drawings

1. Plumbing installer will check and approve and submit Certified Drawings according to

the provisions of Division-1 "Submittals" Section. If no requirement for quantities of

submittals is given, submit five (5) sets.

2. Provide submittals for all plumbing piping, insulation, valves, specialties, equipment

and fixtures. Submittals will include installation instructions and parts lists showing

physical dimensions, gauges, capacities, finish, electrical characteristics, wiring dia-

grams and any other detailed information required for construction and record purposes

by Engineer.

3. Engineer will check submittals only for general conformance with the design concept

of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract docu-

ments. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications.

Installers are responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the

job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work

with that of all other trades; and the satisfactory performance of his work.

B. Maintenance Manuals

1. Instruct the Owner's representative on the maintenance and operation of all systems in-

stalled under his contract, as well as provide maintenance manuals according to the

provisions of Division 1. If no requirement is given, provide 2 sets.

2. Include in maintenance manuals, in addition to those items stipulated in Division 1, a

cover sheet on plumbing installer's letterhead including names, addresses, and phone

numbers of all major subcontractors and materials suppliers, and index of items includ-

ed in manual.

3. Upon completion of the Work, submit to the Engineer one clear, concise set of marked

up prints (latest revision) indicating "as-built" conditions.

1.7 Alternates And Substitutions

A. Refer to applicable Division-1 sections for general provisions concerning product substitu-

tions and alternates.

B. Space, plumbing and electrical requirements are based on the specific manufacturer's model

numbers shown on the Plans. If other than this manufacturer is used, the plumbing installer

shall assume full responsibility to include redesign of the structure, foundations, utilities,

piping, wiring, or any other part of the Work. The cost of all such redesign, drawings, de-

tailing and accompanying additional costs of any item of the Work shall be paid for by the

installer and such redesign shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

A. Refer to applicable Division-22 sections for special piping fabrication and installation proce-

dures.

2.2 Pipe And Fittings

A. Carbon Steel Pipe (Galvanized)

1. Pipe: Galvanized Zinc coated, ASTM 53, Schedule 40.

2. Fittings: For pressure service, 150 lb. malleable iron, galvanized, ANSI B16.3. For

drainage service, 125 lb. cast iron, drainage pattern, screwed ANSI B 16.12.

3. Unions: Malleable iron, ANSI B16.39 250 lb. class, ground iron-to-iron joint, galva-

nized with threaded ends.

B. Cast Iron Pipe (No Hub)

1. Pipe and Fittings: Cast iron, service weight, conforming to ASTM A74, sizes 1-1/2"

and over.

2. Joints: Slip-on neoprene gasket, ASTM C564 with stainless steel draw band.

C. Copper Pipe and Tube

1. Pipe: Hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM B-88 and ANSI B-23.1, type

"K","L", or "M", as specified in individual application sections.

2. Fittings: Wrought copper in accordance with ANSI B16.22.

3. Joints:

a. Soldered. See applicable Section for solder type.

b. Brazed: Make all connections with brazing alloy similar to Sil-Fos or

Easy-Flow. Clean joint areas prior to brazing.

c. Where screwed connections are necessary to valves or equipment, use wrought

copper screwed adapters per ANSI B16.22.

D. PVC Pipe

1. Pipe: Polyvinyl Chloride Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM D 2665.

2. Fittings: PVC socket, ASTM D 2665.

3. Joints: Solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D 2564.




2.3 Piping Accessories

A. Access Panels

1. Square plate and frame with screwdriver cam locking device, of type necessary for the

type of ceiling or wall construction, 12" wide x 24" high or as noted. See Room Finish

Schedule.

2. Manufacturers: Milcor, J. R. Smith

B. Escutcheons: Sheet steel, chrome plated, solid or split hinged.

C. Sleeves: 20 gauge galvanized steel, Schedule 40 iron or steel pipe, or Schedule 80 PVC

pipe.

2.4 Plumbing Identification

A. General: Haphazard markings such as felt tip pens, tape labels, etc., will not be allowed.

B. Pipe identification:

1. Stencils, field applied with lettering sizes generally complying with ANSI A13.1 ex-

cept as noted.

2. Snap-on type semi-rigid color-coded pipe markers.

3. Pressure-sensitive adhesive, pre-printed vinyl labels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Piping

A. Refer to individual Division-22 product sections for execution of piping systems

B. Furnish all piping systems complete with all pipe, fittings, valves, unions, hangers, supports,

sleeves, anchors, etc., as required, specified and shown on the plans. Install all pipe to allow

for expansion, contraction and vibration.

C. Adjust work to fit into spaces allotted. Provide all bends, offsets as required, whether indi-

cated or not. Close cooperation between trades is required. Work installed without regard

for other trades shall be removed as directed by the Engineer.

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction.




E. Isolate all copper tubing from steel and concrete by wrapping the pipe at the contact point,

and for one inch on each side, with a continuous plastic sleeve. Isolate all copper tubing in-

stalled in block walls with a continuous plastic sleeve.

F. Plastic Piping

1. Install PVC-40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D2665 (Appendix).

2. Install all aboveground plastic pipe so as to compensate for expansion deflection,

based on a temperature range of 50 deg. F, using expansion joints, loops or offsets.

Minimum expansion allowance is 2 inches per 100 feet.

3. Where necessary to gain access to valves, cleanouts, etc., furnish and install access

doors or panels of an acceptable type.

3.2 Piping Accessories

A. Escutcheons: Provide for piping passing through finished floors, walls, and ceilings.

B. Pipe sleeves:

1. Fit holes for the passage of all pipes through masonry walls, floors, beams and roofs

with pipe sleeves of size to permit free movement of pipes, including insulation if any.

Trim wall sleeves flush with finished surface, extend floor sleeves 1/4" above floor.

2. Use iron pipe for exterior penetrations; seal both sides with lead and oakum or use ap-

proved mechanical seal.

3.3 Plumbing Identification

A. Pipe Identification: Properly identify all piping indicating content and direction of flow.

Label pipe at 20 foot intervals above suspended ceilings, otherwise at 50 feet intervals and at

equipment, terminals, flow divisions, wall and floor penetrations (both sides), and valves.

3.4 Optional Materials And Methods

A. Use of mechanically formed tee connections and couplings ("T-drill" system) in copper tub-

ing is permitted in lieu of tee fittings, where formed with equipment designed for the pur-

pose and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Such connec-

tions shall be brazed using B-CuP series filler metal.

B. Use of mechanically formed joints in copper tubing (“Pro Press” or equivalent) is allowable.

Use manufacturer’s forming tools and comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23-Page 1 of 3

SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

1.2 Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other

Division-22 sections.

1.3 Quality Assurance:

A. All valves furnished for plumbing piping systems are to be pressure rated. “Plumbing and

heating” valves are not allowable.

B. Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged or welding-end

valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10.

C. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer.

D. Valves Installed in Boiler Rooms: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code.Approval Submittals: Submit product data, catalog cuts, specifications, and dimensioned

drawings for each type of valve. Submit valves with Division-22 section using the valves, not

as a separate submittal. Submit valve comparison chart with applicable valves clearly marked if

valves other than basis-of-design are to be used. For each valve, identify systems where the

valve is intended for use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service

indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as

determined by Installer to comply with specifications and installation requirements. Provide

sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment

connections.

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide valves of one of

the producers listed for each valve type. Other valve manufacturers list names are also

acceptable. The model numbers are listed for contractor’s convenience only. In the case of a

model number discrepancy, the written description shall govern.

2.3 Ball Valves(BA):

A. General: Select with port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe area, include seat ring

designed to hold sealing material.




B. Construction: Ball valves shall be rated for 150 psi saturated steam and 600 psi non-shock cold

water. Pressure containing parts shall be constructed of ASTM B-584 alloy 844, or ASTM B-

124 alloy 377. Valves shall be furnished with blow-out proof bottom loaded stem constructed

of ASTM B-371 alloy 694 or other approved low zinc material. Provide TFE packing, TFE

thrust washer, chrome-plated ball and reinforced teflon seats. Valves 1" and smaller shall be

full port design. Valves 1¼" and larger shall be conventional port design. Stem extensions

shall be furnished for use in insulated piping where insulation exceeds ½” thickness.

C. Comply with the following standards:

D. MSS SP-110. Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

E. Types of ball (BA) valves:

1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller (BA1): Bronze two-piece full port body with adjustable

stem packing. Nibco T-585-70. Stockham S216-BR-R-T. Milwaukee BA125. Apollo

77-100.

2. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller (BA2): Bronze three-piece full port body with adjustable

stem packing. Nibco S-595-Y-66. Milwaukee BA350. Apollo 82-200.

2.4 Valve Features:

A. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide

proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with

ANSI B31.1

B. Valve features specified or required shall comply with the following:

.

1. Threaded: Provide valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.

2. Solder-Joint: Provide valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.

3. Trim: Fabricate pressure-containing components of valve, including stems (shafts) and

seats from brass or bronze materials, of standard alloy recognized in valve manufacturing

industry unless otherwise specified.

4. Extended Stem: Increase stem length by 2" minimum, to accommodate insulation

applied over valve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation:

A. General: Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including

valves in branch lines to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so

that separate support can be provided when necessary. Install valves with stems pointed up, in

vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward below horizontal

plane.




B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper

manner to receive insulation.

C. Applications Subject to Corrosion: Do not install bronze valves and valve components in direct

contact with steel, unless bronze and steel are separated by dielectric insulator.

3.2 Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install

valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

A. Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves. Soldered-joint valves may also be used.

B. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves.

END OF SECTION



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 - 2 of 4

B. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7.

C. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4.

2.3 Hanger-Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod

attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed,

selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance

with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one

manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods.

Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.

A. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.

B. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.

2.4 Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building

attachments complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed,

selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and

manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit

hanger rods.

A. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21.

B. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.

C. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.

D. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34.

2.5 Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping

hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for

exact fit to mate with pipe insulation.

A. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing

of insulation.

B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; use with rollers, fill interior voids with segments of

insulation matching adjoining insulation.

2.6 Miscellaneous Materials:

A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ANSI/ASTM A 36.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes or continuous channel struts selected

for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation:

A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building

structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct

inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other

building structural attachments.

B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at

project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, and installers of

other work requiring coordination with work of this section for purpose of reviewing material

selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with

requirements specified.

3.2 Installation of Building Attachments:

A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for

proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in

MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes

in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to

forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install

reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

3.3 Installation of Hangers and Supports:

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from

building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal

piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with

maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69 or as listed herein, whichever is most limiting.

Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for

smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or

perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.

1. Horizontal steel pipe and copper tube 1 ½" diameter and smaller: support on 6 foot

centers.

2. Horizontal steel pipe and copper tube over 1 ½" diameter: support on 10 foot centers.

3. Plastic pipe: support in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Horizontal cast iron pipe inside building: support each length of pipe (at the joint).

B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and

other accessories.




C. Paint all black steel hangers with black enamel. Galvanized steel and copper clad hangers do

not require paint.

D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are

copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.

E. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting

through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and

Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 Extent of supports, anchors, and seals required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or

specified in other Division-22 sections.

1.3 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and

installation of supports, anchors, and seals.

1.4 MSS Standard Compliance:

A. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with

ANSI/MSS SP-58.

B. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.

C. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.

D. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.

E. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and

Factory Mutual approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide supports and

hangers by Grinnell, Michigan Hanger Company, B-Line Systems, or approved equal.

2.2 Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-

fabricated horizontal-piping hangers and supports complying with ANSI/MSS SP-58, of one of

the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in

accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one

type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly

fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for

insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.

A. Adjustable Steel Clevises: MSS Type 1.



PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00- 1 of 3

SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 Approval Submittals:

A. Product Data: Submit a producer's data sheets and installation instructions on each insulation

system including insulation, coverings, adhesives, sealers, protective finishes, and other

material recommended by the manufacturer for applications indicated. Submit for:

1. Fiberglass pipe insulation

2. Cellular glass pipe below ground insulation

3. Flexible unicellular piping insulation

1.3 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Include in O&M Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation

products by Armstrong, Johns Manville, Knauf, Owens Corning, Pittsburgh Corning, U.S.

Rubber, or approved equal. All products shall be asbestos-free.

2.2 Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings,

sealers, mastics, and adhesive) with a flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and a smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E84.

2.3 Pipe Insulation Materials:

A. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: ASTM C547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. (Preformed

sleeving with white all-service jacket, suitable for temperatures up to 450 deg. F)

B. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer for

applications indicated.

C. Adhesives, Sealers, Protective Finishes: Products recommended by the insulation manufacturer

for the application indicated.




D. Jackets: ASTM C921, Type I (vapor barrier) for piping below ambient temperature, Type II

(vapor permeable) for piping above ambient temperature. Type I may be used for all piping at

Installer's option.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General:

A. Install thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in

compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo

poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive

voids resulting from poor workmanship.

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other

damage. Label all insulation "ASBESTOS FREE".

D. Do not apply insulation to surfaces while they are hot or wet.

E. Do not install insulation until systems have been checked and found free of leaks. Surfaces

shall be clean and dry before attempting to apply insulation. A professional insulator with

adequate experience and ability shall install insulation.

F. Do not install insulation on pipe systems until acceptance tests have been completed except for

flexible unicellular insulation. Do not install insulation until the building is "dried-in".

3.2 Fiberglass Pipe Insulation:

A. Insulate the following piping systems (indoor locations):

1. Domestic hot water, 140° F: up to 3" pipe - 1½" thick, over 3" pipe - 2" thick.

2. Cold water pipe: ½" thick.

B. Apply insulation to pipe with all side and end joints butted tightly. Seal longitudinal lap by

pressurizing with plastic sealing tool. Apply 3 inch wide self sealing butt strips to joints

between insulation sections. Insulate all fittings, flanges, valves and strainers with premolded

insulation. Apply coat of insulating cement to fittings and wrap with glass cloth overlapping

each wrap 1" and adjacent pipe 2". Finish with heavy coat of general purpose mastic.

Premolded PVC covers may also be used, but no flexible inserts are allowed.

C. Provide hanger or pipe support shields of 16 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel over the

insulation which extends halfway up the pipe insulation cover and at least 6" on each side of the

hanger.

D. Omit insulation on exposed plumbing fixture runouts from faces of wall or floor to fixture, on

unions, flanges, strainer blowdowns, flexible connections and expansion joints.




END OF SECTION



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16- 1 of 3

SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Extent of domestic water piping work, is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this section.

1.3 Refer to other Division-22 sections for site water distribution system; not work of this section

unless noted.

1.4 Insulation for domestic water piping is specified in other Division-22 sections, and is included

as work of this section. Insulation requirements include:

1.5 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Plumbing Code pertaining to

selection and installation of plumbing materials and products. Comply with local utility

requirements.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for:

1. Valves

2. Access doors

1.7 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of all approval submittals. Submit maintenance data and

parts lists for valves, backflow preventers, pressure regulating valves, trap primers. Include

these data in O&M manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,

pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide

proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide

materials and products complying with Standard Plumbing Code where applicable. Provide




sizes and types matching pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more than one

type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one

of the following listed for each item.

2.3 Pipes and Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with the following listing:

A. Interior Water Piping:

1. Above Grade: Copper tube; Type L, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper fittings, solder-

joints.

B. Solder joints shall be made with lead-free solder.

2.4 Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division-22 Section

"Supports and Anchors".

2.5 Interior Valves: Provide valves complying with Division-22 Section "Plumbing Valves", in

accordance with the following listing:

A. Sectional and Shutoff Valves: BA1, BA2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General: Examine areas and conditions under which potable water systems are to be installed.

Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner

acceptable to Installer.

3.2 Install water distribution piping in accordance with Division-22 Common Work Results”

Section.

A. Install piping with 1/32" per foot (¼%) downward slope towards drain point.

B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and

servicing of valves.

3.3 Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division-22 Section "Hangers and Supports for

Plumbing Piping".




3.4 Install valves in accordance with Division-22 Section "Valves for Plumbing Piping".

A. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves

two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated.[

3.5 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes

indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Code.

3.6 Locate and coordinate installation of access doors for all valves and devices in accordance with

Division-22 Common Work Results Section S

3.7 Disinfection:

A. Prerequisites: All new hot and cold water piping installed (complete), all fixtures connected,

system flushed out, and system filled with water.

B. The shut off valve at the point of connection shall be closed, all fixture outlets opened slightly,

and a sterilizing solution shall be introduced at a manifold connection installed by the

Contractor at the point of connection.

C. The solution shall contain 50 parts per million of available chlorine. The chlorinating material

shall be either liquid chlorine or calcium hypochlorite. The solution shall be allowed to stand in

the system for at least eight hours after which the entire system shall be flushed.

D. After final flushing, all aerators shall be removed, cleaned, and reinstalled. After final flush the

residual chlorine shall not exceed 0.2 parts per million.

END OF SECTION



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 1 of 3

SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Extent of soil waste and vent systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by


1.3 Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with soil, waste and vent piping is specified in

other Division-22 sections and is included as work of this section.

1.4 Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Plumbing Code pertaining to

plumbing materials, construction and installation of products. Comply with local utility

requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,

pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as

determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types

matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe

materials used in soil and waste systems. Where more than one type of materials or products is

indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2 Pipes and Fittings: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Division-22 Common Work

Requirements Section in accordance with the following listing:

A. Above Ground Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe; service weight; hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings, hubless

joints.

2. Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe (PVC); Type DWV Schedule 40; PVC plastic type DWV

socket-type fitting, solvent cement joints. Do not use in fire-rated assemblies or return air

plenums.

B. Underground Building Drain Piping (within 5 feet of the building):

1. Pipe Size 6" and Smaller: Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe (PVC); Type DWV Schedule

40; PVC plastic type DWV socket-type.




2.3 Supports and Anchors: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division-22 section

"Supports and Anchors For Plumbing Piping".

2.4 Cleanouts: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated.

Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with

installation requirements and governing regulations. Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zurn.

A. Cleanouts for Cast-Iron Piping Systems:

1. Cleanouts in Piping: Cast-iron cleanout ferrule with threaded brass countersunk plug for

caulked piping, Wade W-8550-D. For no-hub piping, furnish no-hub ferrule with W-

8590-D threaded brass countersunk plug.

2. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron ferrule with tapped, countersunk, threaded brass plug and

round stainless steel access cover with screw. Wade W-8450-R for caulked joints. No-

hub ferrule, Wade-8590-E plug, and Wade W-8480 cover for no-hub joints.

B. Cleanouts for PVC Systems:

1. Cleanouts in Piping: PVC cleanout adaptor with threaded PVC plug.

2. Wall Cleanouts: PVC cleanout adaptor with tapped, countersunk, threaded brass plug

and round stainless steel access cover with screw. Wade W-840-R-75. Add same as

above here.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General: Examine substrates and conditions under which soil and waste systems are to be

installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Piping Installation:

A. Install above grade soil and waste piping in accordance with Division-22 Common Work

Requirements Section, and with Florida Plumbing Code.

B. Install underground soil and waste pipes as indicated and in accordance with Code. Lay

underground piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated

with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install

required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants,

cements, and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other

superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each

joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever

work stops.

C. Install building soil and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of ¼" per foot (2%) for

piping 3" and smaller, and 1/8" per foot (1%) for piping 4" and larger.




3.3 Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division-22 Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods section "Supports and Anchors For Plumbing Piping".

3.4 Installation of Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated,

as required by Code; and at each change in direction of piping greater than 45°; at minimum

intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; and at base of each vertical

soil or waste stack. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type to

match adjacent building finish.

A. Install cleanouts to allow adequate clearance for rodding.

B. Protect all finished surfaces of cleanouts with a suitable adhesive covering until construction

is completed.

3.5 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide soil and waste piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and

drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Code.

3.6 Testing

A. Test all piping within the building with a 10 foot head of water. Provide test tees as required.

END OF SECTION



COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 22 42 00- 1 of 4

SECTION 22 42 00 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Extent of plumbing fixtures work required by this section is indicated on drawings and

schedules, and by requirements of this section.

1.3 Codes and Standards:

A. Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of Florida Plumbing Code

pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing fixtures.

B. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to plumbing fixtures and

systems.

C. PDI Compliance: Comply with standards established by PDI pertaining to plumbing fixture

supports.

D. UL Listing: Construct plumbing fixtures requiring electrical power in accordance with UL

standards and provide UL-listing and label.

E. ARI Compliance: Construct and install water coolers in accordance with ARI Standard 1010

"Drinking-Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically-Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers",

and provide Certification Symbol.

F. ANSI Compliance: Construct and install barrier-free plumbing fixtures in accordance with

ANSI Standard A117.1 "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and

Usable by Physically Handicapped People".


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of

selected model clearly indicated, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation

instructions. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type drawings indicating dimensions, roughing-

in requirements, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.

The submittal shall be organized by “fixture number” and each fixture package shall be so

identified. Each fixture package shall include all of the required fitting and trim, even if such

devices are used for more than one fixture.




1.5 O&M Data Submittals: Submit a copy of approval submittals. Submit maintenance data and

parts lists for each type of plumbing fixture and accessory; including "trouble-shooting"

maintenance guide. Include these data in O&M manual.

1.6 Handle plumbing fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, chipping and scoring fixture finish. Do

not install damaged plumbing fixtures; replace and return damaged units to equipment

manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Provide factory-fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each type

fixture, provide trim, carrier, seats, and valves as specified. Where not specified, provide

products as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. Where

more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but, all fixtures of same type must

be furnished by single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures

complying with governing regulations.

2.2 Model Numbers: Basis of design model numbers of a particular manufacturer are listed in the

fixture schedule as an aid to contractors. Where conflicts between the model number and the

written description occur, the written description shall govern. Where acceptable manufacturers

are listed, products are subject to compliance with requirements.

2.3 Materials:

A. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed

surfaces which exhibit pitting seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains,

decoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. All fixtures shall be white vitreous china unless otherwise specifically noted. Where enameled

iron fixtures are specified, they shall be furnished with acid resisting enamel.

C. Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi-exposed provide bright chrome-plated

or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed.

D. Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, pinholes and specks; glaze

exposed surfaces, and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ASTM C 554.

2.4 Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories:

A. Faucets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control),

provide commercial quality chrome-plated, cast-brass faucets, valves, or other dispensing

devices, of type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated.

1. Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Department having jurisdiction.




2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of

one of the following for each item. American Standard, Zurn, Delta Faucet, , Symmons,

Kohler Co

B. Stops: Provide chrome-plated brass, angle type, manual shutoff valves and d" chrome-plated

flexible supply pipes to permit fixture servicing without shutdown of water supply p

1. Provide loose key stops.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

of one of the following for each item. Wolverine Brass or approved equal.

C. Waste Outlets: Provide removable P-traps, drains, waste arms, tailpieces and wastes-to-wall

where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system for all fixtures unless

otherwise noted. Provide drains, tailpieces and waste arms where indirect drains are indicated.

Waste outlets shall be full size of fixture drain connection.

1. Provide chrome-plated cast-brass P-traps and drains with cleanout.

2. P-traps, wastes and drains of all types shall be 17-gauge.


of one of the following for each item. Wolverine Brass, or approved equal.

D. Carriers: Provide supports for fixtures as indicated or scheduled. Coordinate with specific

fixture requirements and conditions of the project.


of one of the following for each item. Josam, Wade, Zurn, J.R. Smith.

E. Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed locations, provide

chrome-plated brass sheet steel escutcheons with friction clips.

F. Comply with additional fixture requirements listed for each fixture and as required for a

complete and functional system.

2.5 Hospital Fixtures:

A. General: Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on plans.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one

of the following for each item.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examine roughing-in work of potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations

of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Also examine floors and substrates, and

conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct any incorrect locations of




piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of plumbing fixtures. Do not proceed

with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights. Install in

accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and with

recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and

serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of Florida Plumbing Code

pertaining to installation of plumbing fixtures. Furnish templates for cut-outs in countertops.

Coordinate exact fixture locations with countertop shop drawings.

3.3 Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure; and ensure that

fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as

to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement. Mount at heights shown on the drawings.

Fixture heights are floor-to-rim distance. Fitting heights are to centerline.

3.4 Install stop valve in water supply to each fixture.

3.5 After fixtures are set, the crack between the fixture and wall shall be caulked with DAP

silicone-based caulking, or approved equal.

3.6 Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

3.7 Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water pressurized, test

fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct

malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and

replace with new units and proceed with retesting.

3.8 Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original

at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged

by Architect/Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units.

3.9 Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, aerators, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of

installation.

3.10 Adjust water pressure at faucets to provide proper flow stream and specified gpm.

3.11 Adjust or replace washers to prevent leaks at faucets and stops.

END OF SECTION



COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1 of 5

SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materials and

performing all operations necessary for the installation of the mechanical work as herein called

for and shown on the drawings.

1.2 Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Provisions of this section apply to work of all Division 23 sections.

C. Review all other contract documents to be aware of conditions affecting work herein.

D. Definitions:

1. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements.

3. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection,

placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting,

cleaning, and similar requirements.

1.3 Codes and Standards

A. All work under Division 15 shall be constructed in accordance with the codes listed herein. The

design has been based on the requirements of these codes; and while it is not the responsibility

of the Contractor to verify that all work called for complies with these codes, he shall be

responsible for calling to the Architect/Engineer's attention any drawings or specifications that

are not in conformance with these or other codes prior to ordering equipment or installing work.

B. Comply with regulations and codes of utility suppliers.

C. Where no specific method or form of construction is called for in the contract documents, the

Contractor shall comply with code requirements when carrying out such work.

D. Where code conflict exists, generally the most restrictive requirement applies. Comply with

current code edition, unless noted.

E. Additional codes or standards applying to a specific part of the work may be included in that

section




F. The following codes govern the work:

1. Florida Building Code. 2009

2. Florida Mechanical Code. 2009

3. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).

4. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101).

5. Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems (NFPA 90A)

6. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), January, 1994.

1.4 Permits and Fees: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, meters, and inspections required

for his work and pay all fees and charges incidental thereto.

1.5 Accuracy of Owner's Data: Prior to commencing any work the Contractor shall satisfy himself as

to the accuracy of all data as indicated in these plans and specifications and/or as provided by the

Owner. Should the Contractor discover any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in the data, he shall

immediately notify the Architect/Engineer in order that proper adjustments can be anticipated and

ordered. Commencement by the Contractor of any work shall be held as an acceptance of the

data by him after which time the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting from

alleged errors, omissions or inaccuracies of the said data.

1.6 Delivery and Storage of Materials: Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage,

unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. All material shall be stored to provide

protection from the weather and accidental damage.

1.7 Extent of work is indicated by the drawings, schedules, and the requirements of the

specifications. Singular references shall not be constructed as requiring only one device if

multiple devices are shown on the drawings or are required for proper system operation.

1.8 Field Measurements and Coordination

A. The intent of the drawings and specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory

installation. Separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve the Contractor or

subcontractors from full compliance of work of his trade indicated on any of the drawings or in

any section of the specifications.

B. Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with other trades'

work. Make use of all contract documents and approved shop drawings to verify exact

dimension and locations.

C. Coordinate work in this division with all other trades in proper sequence to insure that the total

work is completed within contract time schedule and with a minimum cutting and patching.




D. Locate all apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install to exact height and

locations when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown only on

mechanical drawings, be guided by architectural details and conditions existing at job and

correlate this work with that of others.

E. Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions, and retain clearance, headroom,

openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without written approval.

F. Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping, and premises. Compare drawings with

existing conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. It shall be the Contractor's

responsibility to properly coordinate the work and to identify problems in a timely manner.

Written instructions will be issued to resolve discrepancies.

G. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets and fittings or

to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Study carefully the sizes and

locations of structural members, wall and partition locations, trusses, and room dimensions and

take actual measurements on the job. Locate piping, ductwork, equipment and accessories with

sufficient space for installing and servicing. Contractor is responsible for accuracy of his

measurements and for coordination with all trades. Contractor shall not order materials or

perform work without such verification. No extra compensation will be allowed because field

measurements vary from the dimensions on the drawings. If field measurements show that

equipment or piping cannot be fitted, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. Remove and

relocate, without additional compensation, any item that is installed and is later found to

encroach on space assigned to another use.

1.9 Guarantee:

A. The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year from

Substantial Completion, or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier. Contractor shall

make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments to and replacement of

defective items without expense to the Owner.

B. Owner reserves right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation

without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond nor relieving Contractor of his responsibilities

during guarantee period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Equipment and Materials:

A. Shall be new and the most suitable grade for the purpose intended. Equipment furnished under

this division shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of

such items for a period of three years. Where practical, all of the components shall be products

of a single manufacturer in order to provide proper coordination and responsibility. Where

required, Contractor shall furnish proof of installation of similar units or equipment.

B. The label of the approving agency, such as UL, IBR, ASME, ARI, AMCA, by which a standard

has been established for the particular item shall be in full view.




C. The equipment shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in

the production of such equipment and shall be a product of the manufacturer's latest design.

D. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple manufacturers to

indicate quality, material and type of construction desired. Manufacturer's products shown on

the drawings have been used as basis for design; it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to

ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products, or the particular products of named

manufacturers, meet the detailed specifications and that size and arrangement of equipment are

suitable for installation.

E. Model Numbers: Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the drawings and

specifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the

contractor's convenience. The contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for ordering

materials in accordance with the written description of each item and with the intent of the

drawings and specifications.

F. All equipment and material shall be manufactured and assembled in the United States.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first-class

Installation

3.2 Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the mechanical systems

with shop drawings of the building construction so the proper openings and sleeves or

supports are provided for piping, ductwork, or other equipment passing through slabs or

walls.

3.3 The contractor shall protect equipment, material, and fixtures at all times. He shall replace all

equipment, material, and fixtures which are damaged as a result of inadequate protection.

3.4 Prior to starting and during progress of work, examine work and materials installed by others as

they apply to work in this division. Report conditions which will prevent satisfactory installation.

3.5 Start of work will be construed as acceptance of suitability of work of others.

3.6 Interruption of Service: Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie-ins,

arrangements shall be made with the Architect/Engineer and this work shall be done at the time

best suited to the Owner. This will typically be on weekends and/or holidays and/or after normal

working hours. Services shall be restored the same day unless prior arrangements are made. All

overtime or premium costs associated with this work shall be included in the base bid.




3.7 Cutting and Patching: Notify General Contractor to do all cutting and patching of all holes,

chases, sleeves, and other openings required for installation of equipment furnished and installed

under this section. Utilize experienced trades for cutting and patching. Obtain permission from

Architect/Engineer before cutting any structural items. Equipment Setting: Bolt equipment

directly to concrete pads or vibration isolators as required, using hot-dipped galvanized anchor

bolts, nuts and washers. Level equipment.

3.8 Clean-up: Thoroughly clean all exposed parts of apparatus and equipment of cement, plaster, and

other materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Repaint or touch up as required to look like

new. During progress of work, contractor is to carefully clean up and leave premises and all

portions of building free from debris and in a clean and safe condition.

3.9 Start-up and Operational Test: Start each item of equipment in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions; or where noted under equipment specification, start-up shall be done

by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Alignment, lubrication, safety, and operating

control shall be included in start-up check.

3.10 Climate Control: Operate heating and cooling systems as required after initial startup to maintain

temperature and humidity conditions to avoid freeze damage and warping or sagging of ceilings

and carpet.

3.11 Record Drawings:

A. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall record on their field set of drawings the

exact location, as installed, of all piping, ductwork, equipment, and other systems which are not

installed exactly as shown on the contract drawings.

B. Upon completion of the work, record drawings shall be prepared as described in the General

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 sections.

3.12 Acceptance:

A. Punch List: Submit written confirmation that all punch lists have been checked and the required

work completed.

END OF SECTION



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 of 4

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - DESCRIPTION OF WORK

2.1 The work of this section is intended to be performed by a test and balance contractor under a

separate, stand-alone contract.

2.2 Description of Work:

A. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work (TAB) is indicated by requirements of this

section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily

limited to, air distribution systems. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow)

adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and

submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required.

B. Pretesting: Where required by the drawings or other Division 23 sections, pretest existing

HVAC systems as directed and report findings prior to start of demolition work or any other

modifications to the existing systems. Results of pretesting shall be reported to the Engineer in

a timely manner. Comply with standards for final TAB reports described herein.

C. Coordination: Coordinate with the General Contractor and Mechanical Contractor responsible

for the HVAC system installation as required to complete the TAB work.

2.3 The intent of this specification is to balance HVAC systems within the tolerances listed,

maintaining the pressure relationships indicated, with a minimum of noise.

A. Airflow Tolerances:

1. Air Handling: The supply air, return air and outdoor air quantities shall be balanced

within +/-5% of design values

2. Ceiling Diffusers, Supply Registers, Return and Exhaust Inlets: Balance to an air quantity

within +/-10% of the design values.

2.4 Quality Assurance: The TAB Contractor shall be certified as follows:

A. Tester: A firm certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in those testing

and balancing disciplines required for this project. Comply with NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to this work.




B. Tester: A firm certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and

balancing disciplines required for this project. AABC-certified firms are independent by

definition. Comply with AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards", as applicable to

this work.

C. Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to measurements,

instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated.

2.5 Job Conditions:

A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until HVAC work (including

Controls) has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no residual work still to be

completed.

B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from

debris, dirt and discarded building materials.

C. Do not proceed until architectural work that would affect balancing (walls, ceiling, windows,

doors) have been installed.

D. Testing may proceed system by system, but each HVAC system must be complete as describe

herein.

E. The mechanical contractor shall make any changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers, and/or add

dampers as required for correct balancing.

2.6 Approval Submittals

A. Submit the name of the proposed test and balance company for the Engineer's approval within

thirty (30) days after awarding of contract.

2.7 Test Reports and Verification Submittals:

A. Submit four (4) copies of the dated test and balance report upon completion of TAB work. The

report shall include a list of instruments used for the work. The report shall be signed by the

supervisor who performed the TAB work. The report shall be certified by a professional

engineer (registered in Florida) who is a regular employee of the TAB company.

PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.1 Patching Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original

Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled

for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes.




3.2 Test Instruments: Utilize test instruments and equipment of the type, precision, and capacity as

recommended in the referenced standard. All instruments shall be in good condition and shall

have been calibrated within the previous six (6) months (or more recently if required by

standard).

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 General:

A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has

been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.

B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance

with procedures outlined in applicable standards, and as modified or detailed herein.

C. Test, adjust and balance systems during summer season for air conditioning systems and during

winter season for heating systems, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions

within 5 deg. F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10deg.

F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not

permit measuring final temperatures, then take final temperature readings when seasonal

operation does permit. The Contractor shall return for a change of seasons test at no additional

cost to the Owner and submit the revised TAB report.

D. Punch List: Prepare a deficiency (punch) list for the Contractor with a copy of the Engineer that

lists all items that are incorrectly installed or are functioning improperly. Provide a retest after

all items are corrected.

E. Prepare TAB report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format

recommended by applicable standards, modified as required to include all data listed herein.

F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test

purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer.

G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions to show final settings at

completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent

identification materials.

H. Include in the TAB report recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical

performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.

I. Include an extended warranty of ninety (90) days after completion of test and balance work,

during which time the Engineer, at his discretion, may request a recheck, or resetting of any

component as listed in test report. The TAB company shall provide technicians and instruments

and make any tests required by the Engineer during this time period.

4.2 Air Balancing




A. Set dampers, volume controls and fan speeds to obtain specified air delivery with minimum

noise level. Rebalance as required to accomplish this. Simulate fully loaded filters during test.

B. Set grille deflections as noted on plans. Modify deflections if required to eliminate drafts or

objectionable air movement.

4.3 Data Collection:

A. In addition to the data required for any specified performance tests, measure and record the

temperatures, pressures, flow rates, and nameplate data for all components listed herein.

B. It is the intent of this section to record data on balanced systems, under normal operating or

design conditions.

C. Temperatures:

1. Outside dry and wet bulb temperatures.

2. Dry bulb temperature in each room and at least one wet bulb temperature in each zone.

D. Flow rates:

1. Flow rate through each air handling unit (total air).

END OF SECTION



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 of 3

SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by


1.3 Refer to other Division-23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork

accessories; not work of this section.

1.4 Codes and Standards:

A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of both SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" and "Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper

Installation Guide for HVAC Systems".

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems" pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Dampers:

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide 16 gauge dampers of single-blade type (12" maximum

blade width) or multi-blade type. Damper blades to be gang-operated from a single shaft with

nylon or ball bearings on each end. Provide indexed locking quadrant. Parallel or opposed

blade style is acceptable. Provide 2" standoff on locking quadrant for externally insulated duct.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers by Air

Balance, American Warming & Ventilating, Arrow Louver and Damper, Penn Ventilator Co.,

or Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.2 Flexible Ducts – Insulated Nonmetallic

A. General: Use insulated flexible nonmetallic air ducts to connect low pressure supply ducts with

air distribution outlets.

B. Flexible air ducts shall have an inner core consisting of a vinyl coated spring steel wire helix

bonded to an inert and pressure resistant inner liner, covered by fiberglass insulation, R-value of

R4.2, with the fiberglass covered with an air tight reinforced polyethylene vapor barrier jacket.




C. Flexible air ducts shall have UL-181 Class 1 rating, with flame spread rating not to exceed 25

and smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

D. Flexible duct shall be labeled with manufacturer’s name, R-value, and surface burning

characteristics at intervals not to exceed 36”.

E. Flexible ducts shall be suitable for 7" W.C. positive pressure.

F. Manufacturers: Thermaflex M-KE, Certain-Teed Certaflex, Hart & Cooley F194

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to

Installer.

3.2 Installation of Ductwork Accessories:

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with

applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in

accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install balancing dampers at all main ducts adjacent to units in return air, outside air and where

indicated.

C. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 deg. elbows in supply, return, and exhaust air

systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.3 Installation of Flexible Duct

A. Applications

1. Non-metallic flexible duct may be used to connect air diffusers to branch supply ducts in

lengths not to exceed those scheduled on drawings.

B. The flexible duct shall be capable of maintaining the shape required by job conditions without

subsequent sagging or droop. Support ducts with 2" wide straps, 3 feet on center or by wire

from grommets, factory installed for the purpose. Install duct in the shortest direct distance

between components with a maximum of only one 90 deg. turn in a runout. Make duct

connections to collars air tight in accordance with the duct manufacturer's recommendations,

using a metal clamp with worm drive or screw type tightener, and duct tape.

C. Furnish and install a Twis-in duct board or Tap-in sheet metal take off fitting with adjustable

damper at each connection of non-metallic flexible duct to the main duct.




3.4 Adjusting And Cleaning:

A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings. Install fusible links in fire dampers

and adjust for proper action.

B. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting,

and Balancing". However, the system shall be left functional with all dampers open or

throttled.

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END OF SECTION



GENERAL ELECTRICAL 26 00 00- 1 of 13

SECTION 26 00 00 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materials and

performing all operations necessary for the installation of the electrical work as herein called for

and shown on the Drawings. The work shall include but shall not be limited to the following:

Provide all power, lighting, fire alarm, intercom, telephone, communications, and other

electrical systems for the project. Fully coordinate all electrical requirements of equipment

being furnished by other Divisions under this construction contract. Each system shall be

complete and fully functional.



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Provisions of this Section apply to work of all Division 26 Sections.

C. All control wiring for Division 23 shall be governed by Division 26 requirements. All control

wiring shall be in conduit in compliance with the Specifications.

D. Review all project Drawings to be aware of conditions affecting work herein.

1.3 Definitions:

A. Provide: Furnish, install, and test, complete and ready for intended use.

B. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements.

C. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,

anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar

requirements.

1.4 Permits and Fees: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, meters, and inspections required

for his work and pay all fees and charges incidental thereto.




1.5 Verification of Owner's Survey Data: Prior to commencing any excavation or grading the

Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of all survey data indicated on the Drawings

and/or provided by the Owner. Should the Contractor discover any inaccuracies, errors, or

omissions in the survey data, he shall immediately notify the Engineer. Commencement by the

Contractor of any excavation or upgrading shall be held as an acceptance of the survey data by

him after which time the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting from alleged

errors, omissions or inaccuracies of the said survey data.

1.6 Delivery and Storage of Materials: Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage,


protection from the weather and accidental damage.

1.7 Extent of work is indicated in the Drawings, Schedules, and Specification. Singular references

shall not be construed as requiring only one device if multiple devices are shown on the

Drawings or are required for proper system operation.

1.8 Field Measurements and Coordination:

A. The intent of the Drawings and Specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory

installation. Separate divisional Drawings and Specifications shall not relieve the Contractor or

Subcontractors from full compliance of work of his trade indicated on any of the Drawings or in

any Section of the Specifications. Report conflicts prior to start of work.

B. Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with other trades'

work. Make use of all Contract Documents and approved shop drawings to verify exact

dimension and locations. Do not scale electrical drawings; rely on dimensions shown on

architectural or structural drawings.

C. Coordinate work in this Division with all other trades in proper sequence to insure that the total

work is completed within Contract time schedule and with minimum cutting and patching.

D. Locate all equipment, materials, and apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install

to exact height and locations when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown

only on mechanical drawings, be guided by architectural details and conditions existing at job

and correlate this work with that of others. Provide all required work clearances as defined in

the NEC.

E. Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions, and retain clearance, headroom,

openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without written approval from Engineer

or Architect.

F. Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping, and premises. Compare Drawings with

existing conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. Written instructions will be issued by

the Engineer to resolve discrepancies.




G. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets and fittings

or to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Study carefully the sizes

and locations of structural members, wall and partition locations, trusses, and rooms dimensions

and take actual measurements on the job. Locate material, equipment and accessories with


measurements and shall not order materials or perform work without verification. No extra

compensation will be allowed because field measurements vary from the dimensions on the

Drawings. If field measurements show that equipment or material cannot be fitted, the Engineer

shall be consulted. Remove and relocate, without additional compensation, any item that is

installed and is later found to encroach on space assigned to another use.

H. Coordinate all equipment being supplied in other divisions to ensure proper electrical

connections. Obtain full manufacturer’s electrical information and coordinate with electrical

system specified. Make adjustments prior to submitting electrical shop drawings. Mark on

shop drawings necessary modifications due to equipment being supplied. Contractor shall be

responsible for replacement and upgrade of electrical equipment if at time of completion, it is

apparent that electrical requirements do not meet the electrical system’s supply.

I. Verify all ceiling clearances prior to ordering panelboards and switchboards. Dimensioned

drawings are required for all electrical rooms showing actual plan and elevation layouts. Any

equipment ordered prior to verifying that it will fit, will be returned at the contractor’s expense.

Coordinate panelboard and switchboard locations with structural members, beams and column

foundations.

J. Coordinate location of electrical equipment with pipes and duct work being supplied by other

Divisions. The equipment space included all referenced NEC clearances shall be maintained. If

any pipes or duct work violate any electrical clearance requirements, it shall be removed and

relocated at the contractor’s expense. Drip pans are not permitted unless specifically called for

in the construction documents.

K. Guarantee and Service:

1. The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1)

year from Substantial Completion, or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier.

Contractor shall make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments to

and replacement of defective items without expense to the Owner.

2. In addition to the manufacturer's guarantee of each item, Contractor shall provide his

standard guarantee after final acceptance and make good any defects of materials or

workmanship occurring during this period without expense to the Owner.

3. Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in

operation without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond nor relieving Contractor of his

responsibilities during guarantee period.

1.9 Shop Drawings:

A. Shop drawings, product literature, and other approved submittals will only be reviewed if

they are submitted in full accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification sections and the following:




1. Submittals shall not include items from more than one specification in the same submittal

package.

2. Submittals shall be properly identified by a cover sheet showing the project name,

Architect and Engineer names, submittal control numbers, specification section, a list of

products or item names with model numbers in the order they appear in the package, and

spaces for approved stamps. A sample cover sheet is included at the end of this section.

3. Submittals shall have been reviewed and approved by the General Contractor (or Prime

Contractor). Evidence of this review and approval shall be an "Approved" stamp with a

signature and date on the cover sheet.

4. Submittals that include a series of fixtures or devices (such as lighting fixtures) shall be

organized by the fixture number and be marked accordingly. Each fixture must include

all items associated with that fixture regardless of whether or not those items are used on

other fixtures.

5. The electrical design shown on the drawings supports the mechanical equipment basis of

design specifications at the time of design. If mechanical equipment is submitted with

different electrical requirements, it is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor to

resolve all required electrical design changes (wire and conduit size, type of disconnect or

overload protection, point(s) of connection, etc.) and clearly show the new electrical

design on the mechanical submittal with a written statement that this change will be

provided at no additional cost. Mechanical submittals made with no written reference to

the electrical design will be presumed to work with the electrical design. Any corrections

required will be at no additional cost.

B. Before ordering any materials or equipment, and within 30 days after the award of Contract the

Contractor shall submit to the Engineer one complete schedule showing the make, type,

manufacturer's name and trade designation of all equipment.

1. This schedule shall be accompanied by six (6) copies of the manufacturer's printed

specifications and shop drawings for each piece of equipment or specialty and shall give

dimensions, diagrams, descriptive literature, capacity or rating, kind of material, finish,

guarantee, etc., and such other detailed information as the Engineer may require.

2. When approved, such schedule shall be an addition to these Specifications, and shall be

of equal force in that no deviation will be permitted except with the approval of the

Engineer.

3. Each shop drawing shall reference the Specification section.

4. The submittal should reference any delivery/scheduling problems with the equipment

being supplied.

5. The submittal shall not contain any equipment and/or systems that have not been either

listed in the construction documents or provided in an addendum as “approved for

bidding”. This formality may be waved by the Engineer, if in his opinion, it is to the

Owner’s benefit.

C. If shop drawings show variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, the

Contractor shall make specific mention of such variation in his letter of transmittal. If

acceptable, Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in

accordance with the Contract.




D. Review of shop drawings, descriptive literature, catalog data, or schedules by the Engineer shall

not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Contract Drawings or

Specifications, unless he has in writing called to the attention of the Engineer such deviation at

the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop

drawings, descriptive literature, catalog data, or schedules. Any feature or function specified but

not mentioned in the submittal shall be assumed to be included per the specification.

E. Submit shop drawings and any other drawings specifically called for in other sections. Shop

drawings shall consist of plans, sections, elevations and details to scale (not smaller than 1/4"

per foot), with dimensions clearly showing the installation. Direct copies of small-scale project

drawings issued to the Contractor are not acceptable. Drawings shall take into account

equipment furnished under other Sections and shall show space allotted for it. Include construc-

tion details and materials.

F. Submit product data after award of the Contract and before any equipment or materials are

purchased. Product data are defined as manufacturer's printed literature specifically marked to

indicate size and model and accompanied by rating sheets listing values showing that equipment

meets scheduled or specified values. Properly coded stamp from the Engineer on returned

submittal is required before ordering equipment.

G. Coordinate with other division’s supplying equipment prior to submitting shop drawings.

H. Shop drawings shall be submitted in one package unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.

Provide an index of sections list manufacturers and “as-specified” or not. Each Specification

Section shall be tabbed with equipment inserted.

I. Electrical Room Drawings: A detailed, 1/4"=1'-0" scaled plan view drawing shall be submitted

for each electrical room to ensure that the equipment being supplied will fit properly. Include

on the drawings and obstruction from building structural or mechanical. Review all duct work

and piping shop drawings to ensure proper clearance. Specific grounding requirements shall be

noted on the drawings. This includes additional driven grounds and bonding to building steel,

water piping, and foundation rebar. This drawing shall make specific mention of any NEC

violation. Conduit and/or equipment placement shall take into account any structural or

foundation interference. All equipment within the electrical room shall be labeled and actual

dimensions shown. The drawings shall be submitted with the shop drawings and manufacturer's

product sheets. Failure to supply scaled drawings shall be the basis of rejecting the entire

submittal package.

1.10 Test Reports and Verification Submittals: Submit test reports, certifications and verification

letters as called for in other sections. Contractor shall coordinate the required testing and

documentation of system performance such that sufficient time exists to prepare the reports,

review the reports, and take corrective action within the scheduled contract time.




1.11 O & M Data Submittals: Submit Operations and Maintenance data as called for in other

sections when a copy of approved submittals is included in the O & M Manual, only the final

“Furnish and Submitted” or “Furnish as Corrected” copy shall be used. Contractor shall

organize these later in the O & M Manuals tabbed by specification number. Prepare O & M

Manuals as required by Division 1 and as described herein.[ Submit O & M manuals on CD-

Rom in addition to required hard bound copies.] Submit manuals at the substantial completion

inspection

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 All materials shall be new and unused, Owner-supplied, or reused as shown on the Drawings,

the best of their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them. The

description, characteristics, and requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance with

qualifying conditions established in the following Sections.

2.2 Equipment and Materials

A. Equipment and materials furnished under this Division shall be the product of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items for a period of three years. Where practical,

all of the components shall be products of a single manufacturer in order to provide proper

coordination and responsibility. Where required, Contractor shall furnish proof of installation

of similar equipment or materials.

B. Each item of equipment shall bear a nameplate showing the manufacturer's name, trade name,

model number, serial number, ratings and other information necessary to fully identify it. This

plate shall be permanently mounted in a prominent location and shall not be concealed,

insulated or painted.

C. The label of the approving agency, such as UL or NEMA, by which a standard has been

established for the particular item shall be in full view. Materials shall be UL-listed for the

application specified or indicated on the Drawings or Specifications.

D. The equipment shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in


E. A service organization with personnel and spare parts shall be available within two hours for

each type of equipment furnished.

F. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place in service by a factory

trained representative where required.

G. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple manufacturers to


the Drawings have been used as basis for design; it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to

ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products meet detailed specifications and that size and

arrangement of equipment are suitable for installation.




H. Model Numbers: Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the Drawings and

Specifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the

Contractor’s convenience. The Contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for

ordering equipment and materials in accordance with the written description of each item and

with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

2.3 Requests for Substitution:

A. Where a particular system, product or material is specified by name, consider it as standard

basis for bidding, and base proposal on the particular system, product or material specified.

Other systems, products, equipment or materials may be accepted only if in the opinion of the

Engineer, they are equivalent in quality and workmanship and will perform satisfactorily its

intended purpose. The Engineer shall approve all such substitutions in materials or equipment

in writing. This shall occur prior to bidding.

B. In making requests for substitutions, the Contractor shall list the particular system, product,

equipment or material he wishes to substitute and at bid time the Contractor shall state the

amount he will add or deduct from his base bid if the substitution is approved by the Engineer.

If the Contractor allows no deduction or addition to the base bid for such substitution, it shall be

so stated on the request.

C. Requests by Contractor for substitution will be considered only when reasonable, timely, fully

documented, and qualifying under one or more of the following circumstances.

1. Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time

requirements.

2. Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non-

compatible, or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other

recognized disability as certified by Contractor.

3. Substantial cost advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages

including delays, additional compensation for redesign, investigation, evaluation and

other necessary services and similar considerations.

D. All requests for substitution shall contain a "Comparison Schedule" and clearly and specifically

indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as the basis of

design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include but shall not be

limited to data as follows for both the specified and substituted products:

1. Principle of operation.

2. Materials of construction or finishes.

3. Thickness of materials.

4. Weight of item.

5. Deleted features or items.

6. Added features or items.

7. Changes in other work caused by the substitution.

8. Performance and rating data.




If the approved substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the

attention of the Engineer, the Owner reserves the right to require equal or similar features to be

added to the substituted products at the Contractor's expense.

2.4 Prior Approval: Prior Approval shall be required for any manufacturer other than those listed

for all specified items in the Drawings and Specifications. Submit all requests for approval of

the alternate manufacturer's products two weeks prior to bid opening. Approval will be in the

form of an Addendum to the Specifications and Drawings. Clearly indicate all differences

between the specified and proposed product following the guidelines for substitution herein.

This requirement may be waived if, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is in the best interest of the

Owner. Submittals received after the award of the bid for equipment that has not been Prior

Approved is subject to immediate rejection. Any Engineering time required due to equipment

that has not been Prior Approved is subject to billing charged directly to the contractor at the

Engineer’s current billing rate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship: All materials, fixtures, and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first-

class workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods and practice. Any

materials installed which do not present an orderly and reasonably neat and/or workmanlike

appearance, or do not allow adequate space for maintenance, shall be removed and replaced

when so directed by the Engineer.

3.2 Coordination

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the electrical systems with shop

drawings of the building construction so the proper openings and sleeves or supports etc., are

provided for conduit, devices, or other equipment passing through slabs or walls.

B. Any additional steel supports required for the installation of any electrical equipment, etc., shall

provided by the Contractor.

C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that all equipment that may require maintenance

and operation are made easily accessible, regardless of the diagrammatic location shown on the

Drawings.

D. All connections to fixtures and equipment shown on the Drawings shall be considered

diagrammatic unless otherwise indicated by a specific detail on the Drawings. The actual

connections shall be made to fully suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for

servicing.




E. The Contractor shall protect equipment and fixtures at all times during storage and construction.

He shall replace all equipment and fixtures, which are damaged as a result of inadequate

protection. Any electrical equipment with electronic components shall be stored off-site in a

climate controlled facility until the building conditions are suitable for installation. Any

equipment damaged or compromised by unprotected climate control, in the opinion of the

Engineer, shall be replaced at contractor’s cost with factory new equipment.

F. Prior to starting and during progress of work, examine work and materials installed by others as

they apply to work in this division. Report conditions, which will prevent satisfactory

installation.

G. Start of work will be construed as acceptance of suitability of work of others.

H. The Contractor shall review all equipment being supplied by other divisions prior to ordering

electrical equipment. Any conflicts between equipment being supplied and the electronic

requirements on the drawings shall be corrected and incorporated into the electrical submittals

prior to ordering equipment. Installation of the electrical system is the contractor’s acceptance

of equipment requirements. Any conflict with equipment’s electrical requirements after

electrical system has been installed shall be the responsibility of the contractor to make

corrective action. Any corrective action shall be at the contractor’s expense.

3.3 Utilities Coordination: The Contractor shall meet with respective personnel of the telephone,

cable TV and electric utilities and review all details of the service and distribution. All details

shown on contract documents shall be verified for adequacy and accuracy. The Contractor shall

incorporate any required revisions without additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 Construction Electrical Utilities: Provide all temporary wiring for power and light required for

construction purposes and remove such temporary wiring when use is no longer required. The

contractor shall be responsible to provide all cabinets, meter enclosures and conduit required by

the local utility for the permanent electrical service.

3.5 Interruption of Service: Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie-ins,

arrangements shall be made with the Engineer and this work shall be done at the time best

suited to the Owner. Outages must be scheduled through the Engineer. The Engineer shall

review extent, length, and timing of outages. Services shall be restored the same day. Provide

temporary power or other services as required during outages. All overtime or premium costs

associated with this work shall be invoiced in the base bid.

3.6 Cutting and Patching: Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching of all holes,

chases, sleeves, and other openings required for installation of equipment furnished and

installed under these Specifications. Obtain permission from Engineer before cutting any

structural items.

3.7 Equipment Setting: Bolt equipment directly to concrete pads or foundations, using hot-dipped

galvanized anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Level equipment. All floor mounted equipment

shall be provided with a housekeeping pad at least 4” in depth.




3.8 Painting: Touch-up factory finishes on equipment located inside and outside shall be done under

Division 26. Obtain matched color coatings from the manufacturer and apply as directed by

manufacturer. If corrosion is found during inspection on the surface of any equipment, clean,

prime, and paint, as required. If corrosion is found to be extensive by the Engineer, the

equipment shall be removed and replaced with factory new at the expense of the contractor.

3.9 Clean-up: Thoroughly clean all exposed parts of apparatus and equipment of cement, plaster,

and other materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Repaint or touch up as required to look

like new. During progress of work, Contractor is to carefully clean and leave premises free from

debris and in a safe condition.

3.10 Start-up and Operational Test: Start each item of equipment in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions; or where noted under equipment specification, a qualified

representative of the manufacturer shall do start-up. Alignment, lubrication, safety, and

operating control shall be included in start-up check.

3.11 Record Drawings:

A. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall record on their field set of Drawings the

corrections, variations, and deviations for systems which are not installed exactly as shown on

the Contract Drawings.


Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Sections.

3.12 Certificate of Occupancy:

Following items are required for issue of Certificate of Occupancy. These shall be provided at

or before of Substantial Completion Inspection:

A. Provide certification that asbestos containing products were not used in the project.

B. Fire Alarm Certification. In addition, the documentation shall contain witnessed accounts of the

shut-down of electrical and mechanical equipment and the operation of fire doors as required by

Code and the Construction Documents.

C. Provide certification that the Intercommunications System is fully operational (If applicable).

D. Provide certification that all emergency lights and exit signs are operational.

E. Provide certification that all selective protective devices have been set according to the

coordination study/recommendations including all ground fault selections.

3.13 Acceptance




A. Request inspections as required under the Supplementary or General Conditions. Conceal no

work until inspected.

B. Punch List: Submit written confirmation that all punch lists have been checked and the required

work completed. The contractor at the Engineer’s current billing rate shall pay for additional

field time required by the Engineer to report or check on past punch list deficiencies.

C. Instructions: At completion of the work, provide a competent and experienced person who is

thoroughly familiar with the project, for a period deemed necessary by the Owner to instruct

permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish four complete manuals bound in ring binders and

organized by system or section. Manuals shall contain:

1. Detailed operating instructions and instructions for making minor adjustments.

2. Complete wiring and control diagrams.

3. Routine maintenance operations.

4. Manufacturer's catalog data, service instructions, and parts list for each piece of operating

equipment.

5. Copies of approved submittals.

6. Copies of all manufacturer's warranties.

7. Copies of test reports and verification submittals.

E. Control Diagrams: Frame under glass and mount on equipment room wall. Include copy in O

and M Manuals.

F. Test together and separately to determine that:

1. System is free from short circuits and other faults.

2. Motor starter overload devices are sized correctly.

3. Motors rotate correctly.

4. All equipment operates correctly and as specified.

G. Warranties: Submit copies of all manufacturers’ warranties.

H. Record Drawings: Submit "Record Drawings".

I. Install engraved metal or plastic nameplates or tags on controls, panels, switches, starters,

timers, and similar operable equipment, keyed by number to operating instructions. Dymo type

labels are not acceptable.

J. Acceptance will be on the basis of tests and inspections of the work. A representative of the

firm, which performed the testing, shall be in attendance to assist during inspection. Contractor

shall furnish necessary electricians to operate system, make any necessary adjustments and

assist with final inspection.




SAMPLE This is a sample cover sheet. Use one for each shop drawing.

Use whatever standard headings you want here

List each item separately

Typical - list mfr name & model number

General Contractor’s APPROVAL stamp must be on this sheet.

PROJECT NAME PROJECT NUMBER ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: Dell Consulting, LLC CONTRACTOR: XYZ Construction SUBCONTRACTOR: ABC Electrical Contractor SUPPLIER: Jones Supply Co. MANUFACTURER: Various DATE: 2/12/07 SECTION: 26 51 00 / Interior Lighting 1. Type A

2. Type B

3. Type C 4. Type D 5. Type E

END OF SECTION 26 00 00



CODES AND STANDARDS 26 00 10- 1 of 2

SECTION 26 00 10 - CODES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All work under Division 26 shall be constructed in accordance with the codes and standards

listed herein. The design has been based on the requirements of these codes and standards.

While it is not the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that all work called for complies

with these codes and standards, he shall be responsible for calling to the Engineer's attention

any details on the Drawings and/or Specifications that are not in conformance with these or

other codes and standards. Current issue of code applies unless specifically noted otherwise.

1.2 Comply with regulations and codes of suppliers of utilities.

1.3 Where no specific method or form of construction is called for in the Contract Documents, the


1.4 Where code conflict exists, generally the most stringent requirement applies.

1.5 Codes or standards applying to a specific part of the work may be included in that section.

PART 2 - CODES AND STANDARDS

2.1 Codes:

a. Florida Building Code – Building – 2010 with 2012 Amendments

b. Florida Building Code – Test – Protocols for High Velocity Hurricane Zones –

2010 with 2012 Amendments

c. National Electric Code (NFPA-70) – 2008

d. National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA-72) – 2010

e. Uniform Fire Code (NFPA 1) – 2010 Florida Edition

f. National Electric Safety Code (NESC)

g. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) – 2009 Florida Edition



CODES AND STANDARDS 26 00 10- 2 of 2

2.2 Standards: All electrical materials, installation and systems shall meet the requirements of the

following standards, including the latest addenda and amendments:

a. American National Standard Institutes (ANSI)

b. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).

c. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

d. National Electrical Manufacturer's Associations (NEMA).

e. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

f. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

g. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not used.




WORK REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER DIVISIONS 26 00 20- 1 of 2

SECTION 26 00 20 - WORK REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER DIVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this Section.

C. Review all project drawings to be aware of conditions affecting work herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials for this section are specified in the Section "Basic Materials and Methods."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Make connections for the electrical power to equipment furnished and installed in other

Divisions.

3.2 Provide raceway boxes, fittings, devices and conductors for the electrical power to equipment

furnished and installed in the other Divisions.

3.3 Coordinate wiring and conduit requirements with equipment being furnished prior to rough-in.

3.4 Verify voltage, phase, and current requirements for all equipment being supplied by other

divisions. Any modifications shall be incorporated into the electrical submittals with

references to any modification and reason. The electrical system is designed around the

specified equipment. Any change in the equipment shall be coordinated so that proper

electrical protection is obtained. In addition, if the supplied equipment has higher minimum

circuit ampacity that the equipment specified, the contractor shall call the modification to the

Engineer’s attention and make necessary conduit, wire, circuit breaker and equipment changes

to accommodate the higher ampacity requirements.

3.5 Any change from the specified equipment requirements shall be the responsibility of the

contractor.



WORK REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER DIVISIONS 26 00 20- 2 of 2

3.6 The electrical contractor shall meet with the Division 23 contractor and fully coordinate

locations of mechanical equipment, duct work and piping to ensure that proper working

clearance as required in the NEC is obtained. Any conflict shall be reported to the Engineer in

writing prior to the installation of any of the equipment. Refer to additional requirements for

planning drawings.

3.7 Coordinate exact locations and electrical rough-in requirements with other Divisions prior to

installation to ensure proper clearances and code requirements are met.




ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK 26 05 00- 1 of 3

SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All Division 1 Sections apply to all Division 26 Sections.

1.2 Coordinate for all cutting and patching. Contractor shall review all cutting and patching

required prior to bidding and shall coordinate installation.

PART 2 - DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK

2.1 Specific requirements for excavation and backfill for underground conduit are contained in

Section 26 05 50.

2.2 The following is part of Division 26 work.

A. Underground electrical utilities.

PART 3 - DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

3.1 Perform the following as part of Division 26 work, complying with the requirements of

Division 3, Concrete.

A. Curbs, foundations and pads for electrical equipment.

B. Encasement of electrical work.

C. Underground structural concrete to accommodate electrical work.

D. Rough grouting in and around electrical work.

E. Patching concrete cut to accommodate electrical work.

PART 4 - DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

4.1 Refer to Division 4, Masonry for:

A. Patching openings to accommodate electrical work.




PART 5 - DIVISION 5 - METALS

5.1 Refer to Division 5, Metals for:

A. Supports for electrical work.

B. Framing openings for electrical equipment.

PART 6 - DIVISION 6 - WOOD

6.1 Refer to Division 6, Wood for:

A. Supports for electrical work.

B. Framing openings for electrical equipment.

PART 7 - DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

7.1 Refer to Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection for:

A. Installation of all supports for electrical work.

B. Caulking and waterproofing of all wall and roof mounted electrical work.

7.2 Perform the following as part of Division 26 work, complying with Division 7 requirements.

A. Fire barrier penetration seals.

B. Caulking and related shielding around ducts and pipes for sound isolation and attenuation.

PART 8 - DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

8.1 Refer to Division 8, Doors & Windows for:

A. Installation of all access doors for electrical work.

PART 9 - DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

9.1 Refer to Division 9, Finishes for:




A. Painting exposed conduit and equipment.

B. Painting structural metal and concrete for electrical work.

C. Painting access panels.

9.2 Colors shall be selected by the Architect for all painting of exposed electrical work unless

specified herein.

9.3 Perform the following as part of Division 26 work.

A. Touch up painting of factory finishes.

PART 10 - DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL

10.1 Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to Electrical Contractor all necessary nameplate data,

equipment power requirements, wiring diagrams, etc., pertaining to the electrical phase of

mechanical installation, as well as all required motors, on/off switches, warning lights, relays,

and control devices.

10.2 Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring, starters and contactors, and make final

electrical connections to motors, on/off switches, warning lights, relays, and control devices.

10.3 Disconnect switches for mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by the

Contractor, unless specifically noted on the Drawings as being furnished as part of mechanical

equipment.

10.4 Wiring for controls as indicated on the electrical drawings shall be furnished and installed by

the electrical contractor. Control wiring and signal wiring between field installed controls,

indicating devices and unit control panels as part of mechanical energy management system

shall be provided by Division 23, complying with the requirements of Division 26

specifications.

PART 11 - DIVISION 27 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS

11.1 See “Contractor Coordination and Responsibilities Note” on the Drawings.




ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS 26 05 12 - 1 of 3

SECTION 26 05 12 - ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The provisions of this Section are in addition to the provisions of Division 1, Building

Modifications.

1.2 Building will be occupied by owner during construction.

PART 2 - PERFORMANCE

2.1 General:

A. All necessary additions and alterations to existing work shall be included as required to provide

and maintain a complete and proper electrical installation. As necessary, relocate existing

electrical work so other trades can pursue their work and maintain building in service, when

occupied.

B. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Relocation of fixtures, pull-boxes, electrical ducts, and other similar items, to permit the

installation of new equipment.

2. Installation of new conduits, conductors, wiring, and wiring devices, in order to maintain

temporary and permanent use of electrical facilities.

3. Disconnection and reconnection of circuits as required for continued operation of

services.

4. Provision for the relocation of all mechanical work as required for proper installation of

electrical work where not shown or specified in other sections or on other drawings.

5. Repair or replace, as required, any damage due to the installation of the new electrical

system in existing areas.

C. Unused, existing, surface mounted work shall be removed and concealed. Outlets shall be

blanked off.

D. Existing work to be maintained shall be reconnected and shall have all outlets, boxes and

devices accessible after completion of work by other trades.

E. Within NEC limitations, existing conduits may be reused after cleaning.

F. All new work in existing areas shall be exposed on walls in unfinished areas and concealed in

finishes in finished areas. Where cutting and patching are required, finishes shall match

existing surface finishes. In existing finished areas, all work shall be concealed in new finishes.

G. Consolidate existing and new building ground systems.




H. In general, all new work is intended to be concealed in finishes to be added under this project.

2.2 Existing Building Power Outages:

A. All necessary power outages in existing and in renovated areas shall be at a time approved by

Owner in writing and of shortest possible duration. Coordinate details with Engineer, who will

assist in determining Owner's requirements, prior to work.

B. Where portions of buildings are altered, and remainder of building continues in operation,

temporary wiring shall be provided to maintain all necessary building functions. Provide all

equipment, material, labor for a continuous functional system.

2.3 Temporary Wiring for Remodeled Areas:

A. Progress of the work will require temporary wiring installations to utilize a portion of the

remodeled area. Wiring may not be the final, permanent installation, and shall be included, as

necessary to supply required electrical function.

2.4 Planning for Sequence of the Work:

A. Electrical feeders, branch wiring, signal wiring, and other similar work as shown and specified

shall be scheduled to correspond with the sequence of work necessary to demolish, remove and

construct new work.

B. Close coordination in scheduling is required between the Owner, Contractor, and other trades to

assure a smooth work flow with minimum interference and interruption to building power and

communication systems.

2.5 Openings in Existing Work:

A. Provide cutting and patching of existing work as required. Verify exact locations and materials

before performing work. Cutting of structural members and bearing walls shall not be done

without written approval of the Engineer. Provide access covers were required to meet code

requirements.

2.6 Verification of Existing Work:

A. Where shown on the Drawings, work which is "existing" is assumed to be in place and suitable

for the necessary alterations and additions required. Contractor shall carefully field check these

items and include alterations as may be necessary for proper installation and guarantee.

2.7 Removal and Ownership of Existing Work:

A. Unless noted otherwise, existing electrical work shall be removed. Parts of existing electrical

systems that are required to maintain service after the alteration shall remain in service. Unless

otherwise specified, all equipment and materials shall remain the property of the Owner except




as that judged obsolete or unusable. The Engineer shall provide all final decisions about

obsolete or unusable equipment.

B. Property of Owner shall be delivered to a location where directed by the Owner and all other

items shall be promptly removed from the job site. The equipment shall be protected during

demolition.

2.8 Cutting of Concrete Materials:

A. Holes for materials and supports shall be made with uniform speed rotation drilling equipment

which does not provide effects associated with impact type equipment.

B. The use of impact drills, air drills, and the like is not acceptable for this project.

2.9 Maintenance of Existing Lighting Systems and Electric Outlets:

A. Where new lighting layouts are not shown on the Drawings, the existing lighting fixtures and

wiring controls shall be reused. If necessary, these items shall be temporarily removed (as light

fixtures), if necessary, and shall be reinstalled where removed. New wiring from existing

sources shall be provided where remodeling operations require. These items are not shown on

the Drawings and shall be site determined by the Contractor.

B. Where existing electrical outlets are located in areas of remodeling, these shall be maintained in

service. This work is not shown on the Drawings and shall be site determined by the

Contractor.

2.10 Concealed Work: Where required, provide accessed doors to make electrical devices accessible

as required by the NEC. If impractical to install access doors, relocate existing electrical work

so that access is not required. This shall include, but not limited to, adding additional conduit,

pulling new wire, and adding junction boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Not used.




GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26- 1 of 3

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements

specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in

other Sections.

1.3 Submittals


B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

1. Comply with UL 467.

B. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground

construction, comply with IEEE C2.

C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.

b. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.

c. Thermoweld, Inc.

2.2 Grounding Conductors

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Application

A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

3.2 Equipment Grounding Conductors

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding

conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70

are indicated. As a minimum, provide a driven ground rod system (as described below), bond

to building foundation rebar, building steel, and building water service.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. Bond all metal conduit to

metal enclosures.

C. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other

communication systems, provide No. 6AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in

raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring

closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding

conductor on a 1/4-by-4by-12-inch grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.




3.3 Connections

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct

contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type

grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with

winged pressure-type connectors.

C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings

without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a

grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding

bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits

with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

E. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by

connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a

visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.




BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 30- 1 of 21

SECTION 26 05 30 -BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. This Section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods Section, and is part of each

Division-26 Section making reference to or requiring products specified herein.

C. The requirements of these specifications also apply to Divisions 23, 27, and 28 unless clearly

indicated within those Divisions.

1.2 Summary


1. Raceways.

2. Building wire and connectors.

3. Supporting devices for electrical components.

4. Concrete equipment bases.

5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

6. Touchup painting.

1.3 Definitions

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. RGS: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 Submittals

A. Product Data: Submit the producer's standard descriptive data sheets for each type of product

being provided. Mark the data sheet for the product being provided with an identifying mark or

arrow. The following shall be submitted:

1. All Conduit.

2. All conduit fittings.




3. Floor Boxes.

4. Surface Metal Raceway.

5. Cabinets.

6. Conduit coating material for underground use.

7. Fire stopping compound (if required by project requirements).

8. Any other special items being supplied on the project.

9. Cable tray, fittings and shop drawings.




intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. All materials and equipment specified herein shall be UL listed or approved according to the

requirements of applicable NEC articles.

1.6 Coordination

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and

arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical

installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural

components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient

flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in

the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and

services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company

providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by

finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

E. Coordinate equipment clearance and working space with other equipment, pipes, duct work and

obstructions prior to rough in. If clearances are compromised during construction, the

contractor shall be required to relocate/modify as required to meet clearance requirements.

1.7 Other Divisions




A. The requirements of these specifications also apply to Divisions 23, 27 and 28 unless clearly

indicated on the Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Allied Tube and Conduit;

2. Appleton Electric;

3. Belden Corporation;

4. W.H. Brady Co.;

5. Carlon;

6. Challenger,

7. Crouse-Hinds Co.;

8. ETP;

9. Elcen Metal Products Co.;

10. General Cable Co.;

11. General Electric Co.;

12. Hoffman Engineering Co.;

13. E-Box, Inc;

14. Harvey Hubbell, Inc.;

15. Midland-Ross Corporation;

16. Okonite Co.;

17. 0-Z/Gedney;

18. Raco, Inc.;

19. Republic Steel Corporation;

20. 3M; Southwire;

21. Seton Nameplate;

22. Square D Co.;

23. Thomas and Betts;

24. Triangle PWC, Inc.;

25. Walker Parkersburg Textron;

26. Wiremold Co.

27. Westinghouse.Engine Div.




2.2 Raceways

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Federal Specification WWC-563 and ANSI C80.3:

ANSI C80.3, galvanized steel, protected inside and out. Maximum size of EMT shall be 4".

Minimum size shall be 1/2" unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. EMT shall only be used

with cables rated 600 volts or less and in indoor locations not subject to physical abuse.

B. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) NEC Article 350: galvanized steel protected inside and out.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) Federal Specification WWC-581: ANSI C80.6, galvanized

steel, protected inside and out.

D. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) NEC Article 346: galvanized steel, protected inside and

out.

E. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) NEC Article 351: galvanized steel protected

inside and out with sunlight and water resistant and mineral-oil-resistant extruded plastic jacket.

F. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC, with NEMA TC3

fittings as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.

1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Federal Specification W-F-408, except only material

of steel is acceptable. Couplings and connectors shall be concrete and rain tight, with

connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and

connectors for conduit sizes 2” (50mm) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with

four set screws each for conduit sizes over 2” (50mm). Use set screws of case-hardened

steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

Set screw fittings shall be provided with double set screws for each conduit termination

(4 set screws total). Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited. Die-cast or

pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of “pot metal” are prohibited.

2. Flexible Metal Conduit fittings shall be zinc plated steel or cadmium plated malleable

iron screw type with insulated throat and angular wedge fitting between convolutions of

conduit. Federal Specification W-F-406 and UL 5.

3. Intermediate Metal Conduit shall have threaded galvanized steel fittings; threadless,

compression, galvanized steel fittings or threadless, compression, cadmium plated

malleable iron fittings. Fittings shall be rain tight/concrete tight.

4. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit shall have threaded fittings, galvanized steel or

threadless compression galvanized steel or threadless compression cadmium plated

malleable iron. Fittings shall be rain tight/concrete tight.

5. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit shall have polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings suited for the

purpose and joined together by a method approved for the purpose. Schedule 80 conduit

sections may be joined together with threaded fitting connectors.

6. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit fittings shall be cadmium plated, malleable iron or

steel with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with

insulated throat.

7. Wireway fittings shall be steel with rust resistant undercoat and finish coat to match the

wireway. The fittings shall be so designed that the sections can be electrically and

mechanically fitted together to form a complete system. Dead ends shall be closed.




8. Couplings and Unions shall be galvanized steel, tapered thread standard conduit

couplings for intermediate metal conduit and rigid metal conduit. PVC couplings for

rigid non-metallic conduit shall use approved adhesive, and threaded couplings shall be

used for schedule 80 conduit. Split couplings shall be galvanized steel. Unions shall be

ground joint type galvanized steel.

9. Conduit seals shall be galvanized steel, tapered threads for IMC and RMC with sealing

compound and fiber.

H. Bushings: Shall be provided at the end of all conduits prior to pulling cables to protect the

insulation of the conductor. Provide grounding bushings for metal raceways, boxes, and

cabinets to insure that all metallic surfaces are effectively grounded. Metallic raceway may be

bonded to cabinets, boxes and panelboards by double locknut and bushing to ensure the metallic

parts are all effectively grounded. Bushings shall be one of the following types:

1. Zinc plated steel, threaded or threadless

2. Zinc plated steel of threaded or threadless, phenolic insulated with temperature rating of

150 degree C

3. Cadmium plated malleable iron, threaded or threadless

4. Cadmium plated malleable iron, threaded or threadless, phenolic insulated, with

temperature rating of 150 degree C

5. Phenolic with temperature rating of 150 degree C

6. Zinc plated steel, or cadmium plated malleable iron; threaded or threadless; non-insulated

or insulated with grounding connector or grounding lug.

7. Insulated bushings shall have phenolic insulation molded to the bushing (NEC Article

362).

2.3 Surface Raceways (NEC Article 352)

A. Scope: Surface metal raceway system shall be used for branch circuit wiring, fire alarm and

other low-voltage wiring in renovated areas where conduit cannot be concealed. The metal

raceway system shall consist of raceway, appropriate fittings and device boxes to complete

installation per electrical drawings. The areas that are allowed surface metal conduit must be

approved by the Engineer.

B. Classification and Use: Surface metal raceway is to be utilized in dry interior locations only as

covered in Article 352 Part A of the National Electrical Code, as adopted by the National Fire

Protection Association and as approved by the American National Standards Institute. The

Wiremold copy V200 and V500 Raceway systems are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories

under File Nos. E4376 Guide RJBT and E41751 Guide RJPR.

C. Materials: The Raceway and all system components must be UL Listed. They shall be

manufactured of steel; zinc plated, galvanized and/or finished in ivory ScuffCoat (a polyester

topcoat over ivory base) and shall be suitable for field repainting to match surroundings.

D. Raceway: The raceway shall be a one-piece design with a base and cover factory assembled.

Total width shall be 0.50” by 0.34” deep with a cross sectional area of 0.11 square inch. The

raceway shall be available in 5’ lengths. The cover shall be a thickness of 0.025”, the base a

thickness of 0.04”.




E. Fittings: A full complement of fittings must be available including but not limited to mounting

clips and straps, couplings, flat, internal and external elbows, cover clips, and bushings. The

fitting covers shall be painted with an enamel finish, ivory color to match the V200 raceway.

They shall overlap the raceway to hide uneven cuts. All fittings shall be supplied with a base

where applicable. A transition fitting shall be available to adapt to other raceways

manufactured by Wiremold Company.

F. Devices and Fixture Boxes: Devices boxes shall be available for mounting standard devices

and faceplates. A device box shall be available in single and multiple gang operations, up to six

gang in some cases by the use of an adaptor fitting. They shall range in depth from 0.94” to

2.75”. Extension boxes shall be available to adapt to existing standard flush switch and

receptacle boxes. Round fixture and extension shall be available to mount to fixtures and other

devices with mounting centers of 1 15/32”, 1 5/8”, 1 23/32”, 1 27/32”, 2 ¾”, 3 ½”, and 4 1/16”

diameters by use of an adaptor fitting. Round fixture and extension boxes shall be available in

depths ranging from 0.47” to 1.00” and in diameters of 3.0”, 4.75”, 5.5” and 6.38”. All device

and fixture box covers shall be painted with an enamel finish, ivory in color to match the

raceway cover.

G. Where fill requirements exceed the 40% fill of the V200, the V500 series shall be used.

H. Box fill shall not exceed that allowed by the National Electric Code.

2.4 Boxes, Enclosures, And Cabinets

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Galvanized, NEMA OS 1. Boxes shall be 4"x 4" x 1-

1/2" deep or larger(4” x 4” x 2 1/8” deep or larger for telecommunications and CATV). Use

only in flush interior applications or non-finished surface mounted interior applications.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. Use in

exterior applications and interior finished surface mounted applications.

C. Floor Boxes: Per details on drawings.

D. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasket cover. Use in

exterior applications and interior finished surface mounted applications.

E. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Galvanized steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard

enamel.

F. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in

front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include

metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet

where required for freestanding equipment.

G. Fabricated Boxes shall be steel with inside and outside surfaces coated with corrosion-resistant

paint or weather resistant coating. Covers shall be hinged or screwed with or without gaskets




depending on location. All exterior boxes shall be rated NEMA 3R. Boxes shall be sized to

meet the NEC Article 370-6 fill requirements.

2.5 Conductors

A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: 98% conductivity solid or stranded copper.

B. Conductors, No 8 AWG and Larger: 98% conductivity stranded copper.

C. Insulation: THW, THWN or XHHW unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

D. Low Voltage Cables: Provide plenum rated where required.

E. Wire Connectors and Splices: Connectors for 600-volt conductors Size No. 18 to No. 6 AWG

shall be pressure type, spring connectors. Use 600 volt splicer-reducer pressure connectors for

copper conductors to 500 KCMIL. Use rectangular, solderless pressure connectors or split bolt-

copper alloy connectors for copper conductors to 1000 KCMIL.

F. Wire Pulling Lubricant shall be a product produced specifically for wire pulling lubrication.

2.6 Supporting Devices

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-steel channel supports for multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 1-1/2”x1-

1/2” (38 mm x 38mm), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 3/8” (9

mm) diameter steel hanger rods.

1. Channel Thickness: Adjust to suit structural loading of conduit and cables.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-

clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-

type hangers.

E. Conduit Straps: All conduit shall be secured with two hole galvanized straps where the

following conditions exist:

1. All exterior locations.

2. All interior locations other than mechanical and electrical rooms where the conduit is

below 10’. Conduit concealed in wall finishes and ceilings may use single hole strap if

allowed by NEC.

3. All other locations not listed above and approved by the NEC may use single hole

galvanized straps.

4. Single hole or double hole straps may not be used on direct grade. All conduits on grade

shall be mounted to galvanized strut and properly attached and anchored.




F. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

2.7 Touchup Paint

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

2.8 Sleeves: Sleeves shall be galvanized metal flanged type or schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

2.9 Concrete Inserts: Concrete inserts shall be galvanized steel, minimum 14 gauge cut to

necessary length for the purpose. Use galvanized hardware.

2.10 Pull Wire and Pull Rope:

A. Pullwire shall be galvanized steel wire, No. 14 AWG minimum size.

B. Pullrope shall be ply cord with 2000 lbs. tensile strength, minimum.

2.11 Terminal Strips: Terminal strips shall be sectional barrier type made of molded phenolic for

use in wiring control panels. Number of terminals and ampacity shall be as indicated on the

Drawings. The binding head shall be screw in type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Electrical Equipment Installation

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

Comply with NEC Requirements.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other

building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. Materials and equipment shall be

installed in a neat and workmanlike manner according to the standards of the industry.

Materials and equipment installed and not meeting the standards of the industry may be rejected

and required to be removed and reinstalled by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

Minor location changes from those indicated may be necessary so that work can conform with

the building as constructed, to fit work of other trades or to comply with the rules of authorities

having jurisdiction. Refer to structural drawings for framed openings for raceways, etc., in

floors and roofs. Contractor shall be responsible for locating and providing proper dimensions

for all required electrical openings.




C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.

Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 Raceway Application

A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations:

1. Exposed: RGS.

2. Concealed: IMC or RGS.

3. Underground: RGS. Feeders and branch circuit raceways installed below grade equal to

and greater than 3/4" may be Schedule 40 PVC, at the contractor's option. If PVC is used

underground or below slab, elbows and risers through grade or slab shall be RGS, except

as listed below in paragraph 3.4. All exposed raceways penetrating concrete slab shall be

rigid metal conduit (no exceptions). Raceways shall not be routed in concrete slabs on

grade. Raceways routed in concrete slabs above grade (second floor or above) shall be

either RGS, IMC or Schedule 40 PVC. Communication raceways shall be run overhead

within the building except for connection to floor boxes. Communication and/or low

voltage system raceways that exit from under the building slab shall be metallic (in all

cases). Any raceway not meeting this requirement shall be replaced at the contractor's

expense. Additional construction time and compensation for the correction of the

deficiency will not be allowed. Rigid metal conduit installed underground shall be

painted with two coats of alkali and acid resistant paint such as bitumastic or equal.

Coating shall not be diluted and shall completely cover conduit. Coating system shall be

approved by the Engineer prior to use/application.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.

5. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor where conduits pass from

warm to cold locations, i.e., refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air

conditioned spaces, building exterior walls, roofs or similar spaces.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.

B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations:

1. Exposed: IMC or RGS except EMT is acceptable in mechanical and electrical rooms

above 6’ AFF. Conduit may be exposed in equipment rooms, vertical chases, mechanical

and electrical rooms, other similar spaces not normally habitable or exposed to public

view, and where electrical drawings specifically note "exposed conduit."

2. Concealed: EMT.

3. Connection to Mechanical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Equipment: LFMC; exceptions:

controls not mounted on equipment, which shall comply with Section B above; and

smaller air handling units such as variable air volume units and air terminal units

mounted above ceilings outside mechanical rooms which shall be FMC.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations and as listed

in B.4, use LFMC.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC or RGS.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.




7. Rigid non-metallic conduit where used for risers in concealed areas, shall transition to

metallic conduit at the first junction box, but in no case shall it extend higher than 7’

within the space.

C. Use the following raceways for hazardous installations:

1. Raceways in hazardous (classified) areas shall be RGS.

2. Install UL approved sealing fittings that prevent passage of explosive vapors, in

hazardous areas equipped with explosive proof lighting fixtures, switches, and

receptacles as required by the NEC.

3. All devices and junction boxes shall be rated for the classified areas.

3.3 Raceway And Cable Installation

A. Conceal raceways, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Install raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Refer to structural drawings for framed openings for raceways, etc., in floors and roofs.

Contractor shall be responsible for locating and providing proper dimensions for all required

electrical openings. Review structural steel shop drawings and coordinate location of

equipment with structural elements to ensure proper clearance and headroom.

D. Layout and install raceways with sufficient clearance to permit proper installation.

E. Install raceways straight and plumb. Squarely cut conduit and properly ream to remove all

constriction and burrs before making up joints. Paint exposed threads to retard rusting.

Bending of conduit with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

F. Conductors shall not be installed until conduit system is complete. Bending radius of insulated

wire or cable shall not be less than the minimum recommended by wire or cable manufacturer.

Maximum pulling tension of any wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended

values. Do not injure insulation while installing wire in conduits.

G. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. During construction, after

the building has been dried in and prior to any wire being pulled, all conduit shall be cleaned so

that it is free of foreign material and water.

H. Provide an equipment grounding conductor which shall be separate from the electrical system

neutral conductor. See corresponding specification section.

I. Make conduit bends and offsets so inside diameter is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the

same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from the same centerline.

K. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.




L. For slabs located above grade in multistory buildings (second floor and above), embed raceways

in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1-inch (25-mm)

concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete

placement.

2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.

3. Install conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN27) parallel to or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to

slab support.

4. Transition from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit or rigid steel

conduit before rising above floor.

5. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends

parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise,

provide field bends for exposed parallel raceways.

M. For slabs on grade level, conduit shall be buried below grade by a minimum of 12”. Conduits

may not be installed in grade level slabs.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament

plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm)

of slack at each end of the pull wire.

O. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a

maximum of 72-inch (1830-mm) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations.

Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

P. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface. Seal box to

prevent entrance of moisture or dirt.

Q. Boxes: Attach boxes to concrete formwork, or to other surrounding building material. Provide

additional junction and pull boxes where injury to insulation or deformation of wire would

occur due to excessive pulling resistance. When several feeders pass through a common pull

box, tag each feeder separately, indicating electrical characteristics and destination.

1. Boxes shall be accurately located. Consult Architectural plans for dimensions.

2. Mount boxes in the course nearest to the height specified when installed in finished

block, brick or tile walls.

3. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where

shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than

lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 inches square, except 4-by-2 inch boxes may

be used where only one raceway enters outlet.

4. Pull boxes shall be at least the minimum size required by NFPA 70 and of code-gauge

galvanized sheet steel, or compatible with nonmetallic raceway systems, except where

cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Furnish boxes with screw-

fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, tag feeders to

indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

5. Extension rings shall not be used in new construction. Size all boxes according to fill.

Any extension rings found shall be removed at the contractor's expense, unless

specifically approved by the Engineer.




6. Recessed Installation: Boxes and covers shall be installed so that the covers are flush with

the finished surfaces. Boxes in masonry or tile construction shall have masonry boxes or

boxes with square cut tile covers. Do not cut concrete block through its entirety in order

to accommodate any type box. "Handy" boxes shall not be used.

7. Boxes in Partitions: Through type boxes are not permitted except where shown on

electrical drawings. Recessed outlet boxes, cabinets, consoles, etc., when shown located

back-to-back shall be provided with 1/2" fiberglass insulation between the boxes.

8. Verify box/enclosure placement in rated assemblies and comply with UL

spacing/opening requirements. Fire stop as required.

R. Surface raceway and fittings:

1. Prior to and during installation, refer to manufacturer’s layout drawings indicating all

elements of the system. Contractor shall comply with detailed manufacturer’s instruction

sheets which accompany system components as well as complete system instruction

sheets, whichever is applicable.

2. Mechanical Security. All raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and

connected to all electrical outlets, boxes, cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s

installation sheets.

3. Electrical Security. All metal raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in

accordance with the National Electrical Code for proper grounding.

4. Raceway Support. Raceway shall be securely supported at intervals not exceeding 10

feet or in accordance with manufacturer’s installation sheets.

5. Completeness. All systems shall be installed complete, including bushings and inserts

where required by manufacturer’s installation sheets. All unused raceway openings shall

be closed.

6. Install in dry locations only. It shall be used in all renovated areas where raceway is

exposed. Exception: mechanical, electrical, janitor, and storage areas. EMT shall not be

used in exposed finished areas.

S. Wet or Damp Locations:

1. Use rigid steel or IMC unless noted otherwise.

2. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from

warm to cold locations, i.e., (refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air

conditioned spaces building exterior walls, roofs) or similar spaces.

3. Use rigid steel or IMC conduit within five feet of the exterior and below concrete

building slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. Cover conduit on the outside

with factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC or field coat with asphaltum before

installation. After installation, completely coat damaged areas of coating.

4. Wireways and fittings shall be used for exposed work and when installed outdoors or in

wet locations shall be approved weatherproof construction.

T. Bushings shall be provided at the end of all conduits to protect the insulation of the conductor.

Provide grounding bushings for metal raceways, boxes, and cabinets to insure that all metallic

surfaces are effectively grounded. Metallic raceway may be bonded to cabinets, boxes and

panelboards by double locknut and bushing to ensure the metallic parts are all effectively

grounded.




U. Install pull boxes in conduit at intervals of 200 feet or less except when these intervals will

place the pull box cover in a finished floor area or non-accessible place, the interval may be

extended to a maximum distance of 300 feet. Request for each deviation or extension of

interval shall be made and approval granted by the Engineer before proceeding with the

installation. If any conduit run is found to be greater than 300 feet and the contractor has not

secured prior approval from the engineer, a new raceway shall be installed to replace the

deficient one at the contractor's expense.

V. Conduit Installed in Concrete:

1. Conform to applicable portion of Section 703 of ACI Standard Code for reinforced

concrete.

2. Conduit: Rigid Steel, IMC or EMT; except do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are

in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.

3. Align and run conduit in direct lines.

4. Locate conduits in center third of concrete slab thickness. Outside conduit diameter not

to exceed 1/3 concrete slab thickness. Install no conduit in concrete slabs of less than 3"

thick.

5. Conduits in concrete slabs shall not cross at an angle of less than 45 degrees.

6. Conduits shall not pass through beams except when shown on the Drawings.

7. Space vertical installation of conduit through concrete slabs not closer than three

diameters on center.

8. Space between conduit in slabs not closer than six diameters apart, except one conduit

diameter at conduit crossings.

9. Where conduits rise through floor slabs, curved portion of bends shall not be visible

above finish floor.

3.4 Special PVC Requirements

A. Floor Penetrations:

1. Rigid metallic conduit for all exposed conduits, regardless of size and concealed conduits

greater than 1 ½”. Schedule 40 PVC for conduits less than 1 ½” concealed in walls. All

conduit concealed by floor mounted equipment may be schedule 40 PVC (if less than 1

½” and less than 50 feet and length) or rigid metallic conduit (if 1 ½” or greater and

greater than 50 feet in length). Concealed PVC conduit (less than 1 ½”) shall transition

to metal conduit as soon as practical above slab.

B. Bends:

1. Conduits less than 1 ½”: Conduit elbows may be either rigid non-metallic or non-

corrosive rigid metallic conduit. In circuit runs exceeding 50’, all bends shall be non-

corrosive rigid metallic conduit. Bends may be factory or field fabricated using

manufacturer approved heat boxes. Field fabricated bends using blowtorch are not

acceptable.

2. Conduits 1 ½” and larger: Conduit elbows shall be rigid non-corrosive metallic conduit

only, unless specifically allowed otherwise by the Engineer. Schedule 40 PVC elbows

shall not be used.

3. A cable pulling plan may be requested by the Engineer on long pulls.




4. The Engineer may allow special provisions for the installation of PVC elbows.

C. Minimum Size:

1. Minimum size of PVC conduit to be installed below slab shall be 3/4".

D. Jointing:

1. Pipe and fittings shall be cement welded or threaded (only for Schedule 80 conduit) and

made watertight. All joints shall be cleaned with solvent or sanded smooth prior to

application of cement.

3.5 Raceway Methods For Voice, Data And Catv

A. J-hook: A conduit shall be stubbed up above ceiling from each data outlet and each CATV

outlet to an accessible ceiling space. Each conduit shall serve one CO outlet only. Conduit shall

be 1" trade size for data outlets and 1” trade size for CATV outlets. Cables will then be J-

hooked to serving telecommunications room.

B. Conduit bodies such as 'LB' fittings are not allowable.

C. Pull boxes for 1" data conduits and ¾” CATV conduits shall be 4" wide x 4" long x 2-1/8" deep

NEMA 1 galvanized steel with screw cover. Where 1" data or ¾” CATV conduits are tightly

racked with uniform spacing, wider pull boxes may be provided to serve multiple conduits.

Terminate conduits at opposite ends of pullboxes. Do not terminate conduits at right angles to

each other except as specifically indicated.

D. Provide pullboxes for each run of conduit at every 100 feet on center and at each end of conduit

runs containing a total of two 90 deg bends or a combination of lesser bends totaling 180 deg

(minimum requirements - provide whether specifically indicated or not). Conduit runs

containing more than two 90 deg bend without a pullbox are not acceptable. Factory conduit

elbows and all other bends shall have a minimum radius of six times the internal conduit

diameter. Conduit offsets and pullboxes required to suit field conditions and to conform to these

requirements shall be provided at no additional cost to the owner.

E. Conduits that extend outside the building shall be metallic, no exceptions.

F. For existing facilities: NEMA 3R metallic enclosures shall be provided where the conduit exits

the building. The box shall be sided to terminate all circuits and provide proper TVSS and

grounding. A separate driven ¾” by 20’ ground rod shall be driven at each junction box

location. Grounding shall also be bonded to the building electrical ground. Metallic conduit

shall be properly bonded to the metallic junction box.

3.6 Wiring Methods For Power, Lighting, And Control Circuits

A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.

B. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THWN insulated conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.




D. Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated

conductors in raceway for Classes 1, 2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Except for control wiring, the minimum size of wire shall be No. 12 AWG.

F. For all lighting and power receptacle circuits (20 ampere), the minimum wire size is #12 AWG.

The total distance for the travelers on three-way circuits shall calculated and distance limitations

applied. Wire sizes that are installed and do not meet the size/distance criteria, shall be

removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense. The larger wire size applies to the home run.

Minimum wire size for 120V and 277V, 20 ampere circuits to limit voltage drop to 3% or less is

as follows:

1. Less than 50’ - #12 AWG (120V).

2. Circuits greater than 50’ but less than 100’ - #10 AWG (120V).




6. Less than 150’ - #12 AWG (277V).





3.7 Wiring Installation

A. General: Conductors shall not be installed until conduit system is complete. Bending radius of

insulated wire or cable shall not be less than the minimum recommended by wire or cable

manufacturer. Maximum pulling tension of any wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's

recommended values. Do not injure insulation while installing wire in conduits.

B. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent

or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Splices: Splices shall be permitted in junction boxes, outlet boxes of other permanently

accessible locations. Conductors No. 6 or smaller shall be spliced with devices approved

by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as splicing connectors. Splices in conductors larger

than No. 6 shall be accomplished with devices approved by Underwriters Laboratories as

pressure cable connectors.

2. Splices made in underground boxes or wet locations shall be made with commercial, UL

approved cast resin splicing kit (120 volt circuits or greater). Splices for low voltage

circuits may not be made below grade or in wet/damp locations.

C. Wire Pulling Lubrication: Shall be used when any wire is pulled by mechanical means. Wire

and cable shall be carefully handled during installation. Soap flakes or vegetable soaps shall not

be used for lubrication.

D. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet.




E. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical

connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If

manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Provide dedicated neutrals for all 120V and 277V circuits.

G. Conductors in Parallel: Conductors connected in parallel (electrically joined at both ends to

form a single conductor) shall be of the same length, of the same conductor material, the same

circular-mil area, the same insulation types and terminate in the same manner. Where installed

in separate raceways or cables, the raceways or cables shall have the same physical

characteristics.

H. Wiring in switchboards, panelboards, junction cabinets, etc., shall be neatly formed to present a

neat and orderly appearance.

I. Interconnections of control wiring shall be on identified numbered terminal strips.

3.8 Expansion Joints

A. Conduits three inches and larger that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a

building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install couplings in

accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.

B. Provide conduits smaller than three inches with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion

joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5”

vertical drop midway between end. Flexible conduit shall have a green copper ground-bonding

jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as

specified above for three inches and larger conduits are acceptable.

C. Expansion fittings shall be provided for raceways to compensate for thermal expansion and

contraction in conduit runs 200 feet or greater and at building expansion joints. Bonding

jumpers shall be provided for electrical continuity of the raceway system at the expansion

fittings.

3.9 Caulking And Seals:

A. Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls,

smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread

of fire, smoke and gases. Fire stop shall be rock wool fiber, silicone foam sealant or approved

equal. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop

material. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the

conduit and make watertight.

3.10 Electrical Supporting Device Application

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials.




B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at

least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.

3.11 Support Installation

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

B. Support no electrical work from piping, ductwork, etc. Where metal decking is used, provide

supports independent of decking so that loads will not be transferred to decking. Drill through

decking and secure supports to concrete slab.

C. Conduit through Slab Supports: Conduit supports for conduits routed from below grade up

through concrete slabs shall be solid, metallic type. Metallic conduit shall not be used to

support conduits through slab. After concrete slab has been poured and set, supports shall be

cut flush with slab.

D. Support conduit within one foot of changes of direction, and within one foot of each enclosure

to which it is connected.

E. Electrical devices in lay-in and gypsum board ceilings: Coordinate location of electrical outlets

with architectural features of the building and with the equipment of other trades. Boxes or

devices mounted between bar joists or "T" bars shall be supported from two bars or joists.

Devices and associated boxes shall not be supported by the lay-in tiles.

F. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide

U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for

securing hanger rods and conduits.

G. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

H. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent

minimum in the future.

I. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

J. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise

indicated.

K. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be

used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving

lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to

slotted channel and angle supports.




L. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried

entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. Vertical conduit inside

building shall be supported at each floor level and at 10'0" intervals. Simultaneously install

vertical conductor supports with conductors.

M. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.

Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers

are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an

approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

N. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control

enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are

mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

O. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled

holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated

gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during

erection of concrete and masonry walls.

P. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise

indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are

indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry

units.

3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.

4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.

5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe

straps, or other items.

7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.

8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its

proof-test load.

Q. Equipment Supports: Concrete bases and structural steel to support this Division's equipment

and raceways, and not specifically shown on Structural or Architectural Drawings shall be

furnished by Contractor whose equipment or raceways is to be supported. Provide a raised

reinforced 4" concrete base for all floor supported equipment. Equipment installed outdoors on

concrete slabs shall be provided with a 4" raised concrete base. If equipment is being installed

on grade, concrete base shall be provided that will allow a minimum of 3” above finished grade

and sod.

3.12 Firestopping

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to

achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Comply with UL assembly rating requirements.




B. Space junction boxes, receptacles and panels installed in rated assemblies to comply with UL

listings. Verify prior to installation.

C. Cracks, voids, or holes up to 4" diameter shall be filled with putty, caulking, or one-piece

intumescent elastomer which is non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets,

and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat.

D. For openings 4" or greater use a sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance

with ASTM E-814. Sealing system shall consist of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps

capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350F.

3.13 Concrete Bases

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger, in

both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage

recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise

indicated. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.

3.14 Cutting And Patching

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to

permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed

surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and

refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

C. Sleeves Through Roof: Coordinate setting with Division 7. Contractor setting sleeves for his

electrical conduit is responsible for filling sleeve pockets with roof bitumen and insuring there

is no moisture leakage during roof guarantee period.

3.15 Field Quality Control

A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Raceways.

2. Building wire and connectors.

3. Supporting devices for electrical components.

4. Electrical identification.

5. Concrete bases.

6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

7. Touchup painting.

3.16 Refinishing And Touchup Painting




A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in

Division 9 Section "Painting."

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to

suit the degree of damage at each location.

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing

and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.

5. Finishes in areas not listed or otherwise noted shall be black enamel.

6. Hangers, supports, structural steel and equipment that are not factory finished shall be

prime coated and finished coated with color to match the area in which it will be located.

7. Electric cabinets, switchboards, panelboards and equipment that is factory finished and

has damaged finish shall be touched up to match the factory finish.

8. All surfaces that are to be painted shall be free of rust, scale, oil and grease before prime

coat is applied.

9. Paint all junction boxes and conduit as described herein.

3.17 Grounding

A. Ground and bond in accordance with NEC Article 250 and other applicable articles.

B. Provide an equipment grounding conductor which shall be separate from the electrical system

neutral conductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be colored green. It shall be

continuous from a connection at the Service Entrance Equipment Ground to all switchboards,

distribution and branch panelboards. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided in all

branch circuits serving convenience outlets, receptacles, portable and permanently installed

electrical appliances, equipment apparatus and other miscellaneous metal enclosing bodies

including light switch boxes normally within contact of personnel. Branch circuit grounding

conductors shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Connections at

panelboards, outlets, equipment and apparatus shall be made in an approved and permanent

manner. Resistance to ground shall not exceed 15 ohms.

C. Bond bushings of the raceway system to ground lugs in boxes, cabinets, motors and equipment

to assure electrical continuity of all metallic components of the electrical systems. Comply with

the requirements of NEC Articles 250D, 250E, 250F, 250G, 250J and 250K. Where equipment

is not provided with a grounding lug, provide ground lugs suitable for wire being installed.

3.18 Cleaning And Protection

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,

and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




3.19 General Tests And Inspections

A. Prepare systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and perform preliminary

tests to ensure that systems, equipment, and components are ready for testing. Include the

following minimum preparations as appropriate:

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

2. Perform continuity tests.

3. Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested).

B. Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.2.

C. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.3.

D. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the

following:

1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.

2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved in

tests.

3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.

4. Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.




ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53 - 1 of 7

SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary


1. Identification for raceway.

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.

3. Underground-line warning tape.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Instruction signs.

6. Equipment identification labels.

7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.


C. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Raceway Identification:

A. Paint: Semigloss acrylic-enamel.




B. Marker for circuit identification on box covers: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

(exception : brown and black painted covers which shall use permanent, waterproof, white paint

based marker).

2.2 Conductor and Cable Identification Materials:

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use

with self-locking nylon tie fastener.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.01 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester

or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

2.3 Floor Marking Paint:

A. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat(s) over a primer.

1. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.

2. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

2.4 Warning Labels and Signs:

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise

indicated.




C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners,

with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for

mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,

cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors,

legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal

size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

F. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2.5 Instruction Signs:

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20

sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

B. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

C. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

D. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.6 Equipment Identification Labels:

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.

White letters on a dark-gray background. White letters on a red background for Emergency and

Optional Standby systems.

2.7 Miscellaneous Identification Products:

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Accessible Raceways 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits:

A. Identify interior raceway systems with paint as follows:

1. Conduits: paint all couplings per the color coding below.

2. Junction Boxes:

a. Paint all junction and pull box covers per the color coding below.

b. For covers containing branch circuits: after painting the cover the appropriate

color, hand write the panelboard/circuit number contained in the box (i.e. 2P1-

15,17,19).

c. For covers containing feeder circuits: after painting the cover the appropriate color,

hand write the feeding panel and load panel (i.e. 4D1 to 2P1A).

B. Coupling and box cover colors as follows:

1. 120/208 Volt Systems: Black.

2. 277/480 Volt Systems: Brown.

3. 120/208 and 277/480 Volt System Junction Boxes containing Emergency Circuits: Paint

box cover color of voltage and provide a red stripe.

3.2 Auxiliary Systems:

A. Identify interior raceway systems with paint as follows:

1. Conduits: paint all couplings per the color coding below.

2. Junction Boxes: Paint all junction and pull box covers per the color coding below.

B. Coupling and box cover colors as follows:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red.

2. Access Control & Security System: Yellow.

3. Telecommunication System: Blue.

4. Other Systems: Paint a unique color (do not use any of the above colors or green or

white).




3.3 Conductors:

A. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by

manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

B. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull

and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source

and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in

addition to the above.

D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three

branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each

ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

3.4 Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply

with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with

black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

3.5 Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment

including, but not limited to, the following:

A. Power transfer switches.

B. Controls with external control power connections.

3.6 Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise

indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar

equipment in finished spaces.

3.7 Instruction Signs:




A. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance

of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved

legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

B. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red

background with minimum 3/3inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment.

3.8 Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is

provided with its own identification.

3.9 Labeling Instructions:

A. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated,

provide a with 1/4-inch high letters on 1-inch high label.

B. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from

the floor.

D. Equipment to Be Labeled:

1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

3. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.

4. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and

control functions.

3.10 Installation:

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.




D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to

the location and substrate.

F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed

below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

G. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1. Phase A: Black.

2. Phase B: Red.

3. Phase C: Blue.

4. Neutral: White.

5. Grounding Conductor: Green.

H. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1. Phase A: Brown.

2. Phase B: Orange.

3. Phase C: Yellow.

4. Neutral: Gray.

5. Grounding Conductor: Green with stripe.

I. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum

distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply

last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid

obscuring factory cable markings.

J. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or

cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

K. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting

Sections.

L. Identification Schedule: Prior to Substantial Completion Inspection provide one framed and

under glass 11" x 17" color copy of the approved Identification Schedule in each electrical

room.




PANELBOARDS 26 24 20- 1 of 8

SECTION 26 24 20 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 Definitions

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 Submittals

A. Approval Submittals:

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, specifications and installation

instructions for each type of:

1. Panelboard

2. Overcurrent protective device

3. Transient voltage surge suppression device

C. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:




a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

e. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. in accordance with

UL Standard 67.

G. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869.

1.6 Project Conditions

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).




B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.7 Coordination

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

C. Provide recommended settings for all circuit breakers with selectable settings to coordinate with

down stream devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers


following:

1. Panelboards and Accessories:

a. Siemens

b. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

c. Square D.

2.2 Panelboards

A. Enclosures: Galvanized surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Hinged Front Cover (Indoor units only): Entire front trim hinged to box and with

standard door within hinged trim cover.

3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or

primer coat.




6. Directory Card: Type written with transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame,

inside panelboard door.

7. Provide an engraved laminated phenolic or micarta nameplate 1" high by 3" wide with

minimum 1/4" letters indicating the panelboard identification, voltage and upstream

protective device. The panelboard shall also have a nameplate affixed to the panelboard

with the following information stamped therein: Nameplate: Manufacturer, Voltage,

Ampacity, Type of Panelboard, Manufacturer's Order No. and Date, Interrupting Rating -

RMS Sym.

B. Phase and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground

conductors; bonded to box. Ground bus shall have the same rating as the panelboard.

3. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads as indicated on drawings.

C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.

D. Service Equipment Label (where indicated): UL labeled for use as service equipment for

panelboards with main service disconnect switches.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for

future installation of devices.

2.3 Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating

A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.4 Distribution Panelboards

A. Doors: Concealed hinges, secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. For Circuit-Breakers: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.5 Lighting And Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.




B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.6 TVSS - Panelboard Suppressors

A. Surge Protective Device Description: Modular design, UL 1449 2nd Edition Listed, mounted

integral to panel enclosure with field-replaceable modules and the following features and

accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.

2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.

3. Integral disconnect switch.

4. Arrangement with direct bus connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.

5. Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

6. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.

7. One set of dry contacts rated at 2A, 24-V dc, for remote monitoring of protection status.

Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

8. Surge-event operations counter.

9. The TVSS system shall be duty life cycle tested to survive a minimum of 2,500 surges

per phase of 20kV, 10 kA, IEEE C62.41 Category C3 surge current with less than 5%

degradation of clamping voltage.

10. The TVSS system shall have EMI/RFI filtering, UL1283 listed and per MIL-STD-220A.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 100kA per phase (L-N + L-G), 50kA per mode.

C. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with voltages of

480Y/277 or 208Y/120; 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400V for 208Y/120.

2. Line to Ground: 400V for 208Y/120.

3. Neutral to Ground: 400V for 208Y/120.

2.7 Overcurrent Protective Devices

A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case with trip units of size, type and quantity shown on the

drawings. The circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type, equipped with individually insulated,

braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each

other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a

uniform position. Paper stickers are not acceptable for individual circuit numbers. Individual

circuit numbers shall be phenolic. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle.

Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to

add circuit breakers. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type and size of

conductor provided for.




B. The following are general/minimum requirements. Provide features trip units, etc. per the

selective coordination study as required to achieve coordination.

1. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK.

3. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Unless indicated

otherwise, breakers smaller than 250A frame shall be thermal-magnetic.

4. Adjustable Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-

adjustable trip setting. Unless indicated otherwise, breakers smaller than 800A frame

and at least 250A frame shall be adjustable thermal-magnetic.

5. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: Unless indicated otherwise, breakers 800A frame

and larger shall be electronic trip type. RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug;

with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

C. Multipole Breakers: Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design

shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase

sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases

A, B, and C, respectively.

2.8 Accessory Components And Features

A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent

protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts

uniformly flush with wall finish.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.




1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

G. Provide four ¾” conduits from all recessed panelboards to above accessible ceiling for future

use.

3.2 Identification

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a

computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Verify

room numbers with Owner prior to creating directory. All room and building numbers/names

shall reflect the final labels assigned for occupancy.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved laminated-plastic nameplate

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplate shall comply with the requirements listed

in Section 2.2.A.7 above.

3.3 Connections

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,

Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify

compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.




1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings

before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scanning of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints

and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards

checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,

remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

E. Equipment Meters. Adjust and calibrate as recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 Cleaning

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.




CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR EXISTING PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 22 - 1 of 3

SECTION 26 24 22 - CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR EXISTING PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary:

A. This Section includes group and individually mounted circuit breakers.

1.3 Definitions:

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. HD: Heavy duty.

C. RMS: Root mean square.

D. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.




intended use.


C. All products shall be UL listed.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for circuit

breakers, including clearances between adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with

indicated maximum dimensions.

1.5 Project Conditions:

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not

exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).




1.6 Coordination:

A. Coordinate layout and installation of circuit breakers and components with the existing panel or

switchboard. Provide the appropriate frame size and any required mounting hardware as

required for proper installation.

1.7 Submittals:

A. Product Data: For each type of circuit breaker, accessory and component indicated. Include

dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features,

performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breakers.

3. Current and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating.

5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.

1.8 O&M Data Submittals:

A. Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists. Include in these data, a copy of

approval submittals (product data & shop drawings) in O&M manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers: Provide as required to match existing panel or switchboard.

2.2 Molded-case Circuit Breakers and Switches:

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to match that of the

panel or switchboard.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR

for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

4. Shall have overcenter, trip free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make,

quick-break action and positive handle indication. All breakers shall be bolt-on type.

5. Circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and

magnetic trip elements in each pole.

6. Provide with shunt trip features where indicated on the Drawings.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive circuit breakers for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Installation:

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation

of circuit breakers.

3.3 Identification:

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components.

3.4 Adjusting:

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.5 Cleaning:

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air

to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.




GENERAL WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26- 1 of 6

SECTION 26 27 26 - GENERAL WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge

suppression units, and isolated-ground receptacles.

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches.

3. Device wall plates.

4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles.

5. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.

1.3 Definitions

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 Submittals

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, specifications and installation

instructions. For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single

manufacturer.




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. UL Listed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers


following:

1. Wiring Devices:

a. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

c. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

2. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:

a. Crouse-Hinds/Cooper Industries, Inc.; Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.

b. EGS/Appleton Electric Company.

c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co./Hubbell Incorporated.

3. Multioutlet Assemblies:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

b. Wiremold Company (The).

4. Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

c. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

e. Wiremold Company (The).

2.2 Receptacles

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-

596G, and UL 498. Devices shall be heavy duty, specification grade. Use gray finished devices

throughout except as hereinafter noted otherwise.




B. Single Receptacle Devices:

20 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire, 125V, NEMA 5-20R Hubbell HBL5361








20 amp, 3 pole, 4 wire, 125/250V, NEMA 14-20R Hubbell HBL8410

30 amp, 3 pole, 4 wire, 125/250V, NEMA 14-30R Hubbell HBL9430A



20 amp, 3 pole, 4 wire, 250V, 3PH, No Neutral NEMA 15-20R Hubbell HBL8420

30 amp, 3 pole, 4 wire, 250V, 3PH, No Neutral NEMA 15-30R Hubbell HBL8430A



C. Duplex Receptacle Devices: The receptacle shall be heavy duty specification grade and have the

following features: back and side wiring, 0.032 inches thick brass triple wipe power contacts,

brass center inset, all brass grounding system, impact resistant nylon face, thick wall thermoset

base. 15 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire, 125V, NEMA 5-15R Hubbell HBL5252. 20 amp, 2 pole, 3 wire,

125V, NEMA 5-20R Hubbell HBL5352.

D. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade devices shall be heavy duty specification grade. Use gray

finished devices throughout except as hereinafter noted otherwise, with integral NEMA WD 6,

Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for

installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. Hubbell GFR 5262 or

approved equal.

E. TVSS Receptacles: Straight blade, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, with integral TVSS in

line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. Hubbell HBL 8262 or approved equal.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp level rating of

500 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 140 J line to neutral,

and 70 J line to ground and neutral to ground.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible with light visible in face of device to

indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

3. Identification: Distinctive marking on face of device to denote TVSS-type unit.

2.3 Switches

A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.

1. Single Pole, 20 amp, 120/277 shall be Hubbell HBL1221 or approved equal.

2. Double Pole, 20 amp, 120/277V shall be Hubbell HBL1222 or approved equal.

3. Three-Way, 20 amp, 120/277V shall be Hubbell HBL1223 or approved equal.




4. Four-Way, 20 amp, 120/277V shall be Hubbell HBL1224 or approved equal.

B. Snap Switches: Specification grade, quiet type, abuse resistant nylon toggle, color coded base,

one piece rivetless copper alloy spring contact arm & terminal plate, one piece integral

grounding terminal with #8 brass screw, stainless steel automatic grounding clip, back wiring,

one piece rivetless copper alloy spring contact arm and terminal plate. Provide 15 amp switch

for circuits controlling up to but not exceeding 15 amperes. Provide 20 amp switch for circuit

exceeding 15 amperes but less than or equal to 20 amperes. Provide 30 ampere switches for

circuits exceeding 20 amperes but less than 30 amperes. Use gray devices throughout.

2.4 Wall Plates

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Material for Finished Spaces: Provide UL listed one-piece device plates for outlets to

suit the devices installed. Except as noted below, all wiring device plates shall be 302

stainless steel, 0.032 in. thick. Jumbo device plates shall be used on all walls, Hubbell

‘SJ’ series, 302 stainless steel or approved equal. Sectional type device plates will not be

permitted. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish

of plate.

2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Provide UL listed one-piece device plates for outlets to

suit the devices installed. Except as noted below, all wiring device plates shall be 302,

stainless steel 0.032 in. thick. Jumbo device plates shall be used on all walls, Hubbell

‘SJ’ series, 302 stainless steel or approved equal. Sectional type device plates will not be

permitted. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish

of plate.

3. Material for Wet Locations: Plates installed in wet locations shall be cast, gasketed and

UL listed for "wet locations."

2.5 Floor Service Fittings

A. Type: Modular, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 Finishes

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated

or required by NFPA 70.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

3. TVSS Devices: Blue.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.

B. Mounting Heights: Mounting heights for receptacle outlets shall be 18" above finished floor or

as indicated on the Drawings. Mounting heights for receptacles over casework shall be 7"

above counter top. Verify all receptacle heights prior to rough-in. Provide a written description

to the Engineer, prior to rough-in, any conflicts. The Contractor shall at his expense, be

responsible for the relocation of any receptacle not installed according to these specifications.

C. Prior to roughing-in wall outlet boxes, the Contractor shall verify from general construction

drawings; door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters and work benches. Do

not scale the plans; location of devices is shown on plans in desired vicinity. The Contractor

shall carefully locate devices symmetrically and in coordination with architectural features.

D. Switches that control remote outlets, fans, etc., shall have engraved plastic name tags indicating

the outlets, fans, etc. that are controlled.

E. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' written instructions.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension

vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under

single, multigang wall plates.

H. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and

furnishings.

3.2 Connections

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to

manufacturer's written instructions.




B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.




INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1 of 7

SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary


1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts.

2. Emergency lighting units.

3. Exit signs.

1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture

designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated

parameters.

2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.

3. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.

4. Lamps.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights,

methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 O & M Submittals:

A. Submit manufacturer’s maintenance data including parts lists. Include in these data, a copy of

approval submittals (product data and shop drawings) in O & M manual.





A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicted, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.



intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.

1.6 Coordination

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-

suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work include the products specified.

2.2 Fixtures And Components, General

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1570.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent

warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.




3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.156 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different

thickness is scheduled.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Tempered glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 Lighting Fixtures

A. Fixtures shall be as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule

2.4 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

A. Programmed Start Solid State Electronic Ballasts: Electronic ballasts shall include the following

features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. The electronic ballast shall be physically interchangeable with standard electromagnetic

ballasts and standard electronic ballasts.

2. The electronic ballast shall have a maximum height of 1.18 in. and maximum weight of

1.8 lbs.

3. The electronic ballast shall be furnished with integral leads, color-coded to ANSI C82.11.

4. The electronic ballast shall operate from a nominal line voltage of 120 or 277 volts, +/-

10%, 60Hz.

5. The electronic ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less

than 10% when used with primary lamp.

6. The electronic ballast shall have a Power Factor greater than 98% when used with

primary lamp.

7. The electronic ballast shall withstand a sustained short to ground or open circuit of any

output leads.

8. The electronic ballast shall be Sound Rated A.

9. The electronic ballast shall be specifically designed for use with the specified lamps.

10. The electronic ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 40kHz to minimize

interference with infrared control systems and eliminate visible flicker.

11. The electronic ballast shall meet ANSI C82.11, where applicable.

12. The electronic ballast shall withstand transients specified in ANSI C62.41, Location

Category A3.

13. The electronic ballast shall be CBM certified, where applicable.

14. The electronic ballast shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications

Commission rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR part 18, for Non-Consumer equipment.




15. The electronic ballast shall comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency

standards.

16. The electronic ballast shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed (Class P) and CSA

Certified where applicable.

17. The electronic ballast shall not contain Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB's).

18. The electronic ballast shall carry a five-year warranty from the date of manufacture.

Warranty shall be valid for a maximum case temperature of 70°C.

19. The manufacturer shall have a ten-year history of producing electronic ballast for the

North American market.

20. The electronic ballast shall be produced in a factory certified to ISO 9002 Quality System

Standards.

21. Ballast shall be produced in the United States of America.

22. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0°F.

23. Approved Manufacturer: Universal Accustart, Phillips Advance Optanium series, G.E.

Ultra Start.

2.5 Exit Signs

A. General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp

life.

C. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power

pack.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with special warranty.

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

4. Shall have Self Verification and Test capability installed.

2.6 Emergency Lighting Units

A. General: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10-year nominal life

and special warranty.

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops

to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery




when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

4. 1,400 lumen output for a minimum of 90 minutes during battery operation.

5. Wire Guard: Where indicated, heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or

fixtures.

6. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval when power is restored after

an outage; time delay permits high-intensity-discharge lamps to restrike and develop

adequate output.

7. Shall have Self Verification and Test capability installed.

2.7 Fluorescent Emergency Lighting Fixtures

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture

body. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect

unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.

3. Test Switch and Light-Emitting-Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without

opening fixture or entering ceiling space.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum seven-year

nominal life.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

6. 1400 lumen ouput for a minimum of 90 minutes depending upon lamp type and quantity.

7. Approved manufacturers are Bodine, Beghelli and Emergi-Lite.

8. In exterior locations, provide equipment capable of operating at temperatures from 0° F

to 130° F.

2.8 Fluorescent Lamps

A. T8 Fluorescent: Provide the number, type, and wattage indicated. T8 lamps shall be rapid start,

low mercury, rated 32 watts, 2950 approximate initial lumens, 24,000 hours average rated life,

82 CRI, 4100k color temp. Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start. Lamps

shall be General Electric, Sylvania, Philips.

2.9 Fixture Support Components

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and

angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling

canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount

a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.




D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless

steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by

fixture manufacturer.

2.10 Finishes

A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. Paint

shall be applied after fabrication.

2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.

2.11 Source Quality Control

A. Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test

fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data.

B. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and

photometric data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. Fixtures: Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment

with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and

approved drawings. The installation shall meet with the requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting

heights specified or indicated shall be to bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to

center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting

fixtures on the job before installation is commenced and, where applicable, after coordinating

with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. 1’ x 4’, 2’ x 4’ and 2’ x 4’

Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures may be supported from suspended ceiling support system

ceiling tees if the ceiling system support wires are provided at a minimum of four wires per

fixture and located not more than 6 inches from each corner of the fixture. Additionally, for

recessed fixtures, provide support clips securely fastened to ceiling grid members, a minimum

of one at or near each corner of each fixture. For round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than

the ceiling grid, provide a minimum of four wires per fixture and locate at each corner of the

ceiling grid in which the fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels.

Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicted to be centered in the acoustical

panel, support such fixtures independently or with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels




spanning, and secured to the ceiling tees. Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this

section. There are many type of ceiling systems available on the market and any number of

these ceiling systems may be used as part of this work. Verify the types of ceiling construction

before ordering fixture fabrication. Determine that suspension methods and flange arrange-

ments for fixtures coordinate with ceiling types and their suspension systems.

B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

3.2 Connections

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal. Test every fixture and provide

written documentation of results.

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.

E. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion.

F. Clean all fixtures. Wipe down and remove finger prints, dust, dirt, grime, etc.

G. Lamp “Burn-In”: All lamps, at initial energization, shall be “burned-in” at 100% output for a

minimum of 100 hours.




TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL 27 00 00- 1 of 9

SECTION 27 00 00 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The work covered by this division consists of providing all labor, equipment and materials and

performing all operations necessary for the installation of the structured cabling system work

as herein called for and shown on the Drawings.



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. This is a Basic Telecommunications Requirements Section. Provisions of this Section apply to

work of all Division 27 Sections.

C. Comply with all requirements of Division 26 Sections, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

and Electrical Grounding.

D. Review all project Drawings to be aware of conditions affecting work herein.

1.3 Definitions

A. Provide: Furnish, install, and test, complete and ready for intended use.

B. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for subsequent requirements.

C. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing,

anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, test

complete ready for intended use, and similar requirements.

D. Other definitions used throughout these Division 27 specifications:

1. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

2. CO: Communications Outlet.

3. CP: Consolidation Point.

4. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference

5. FUT: Fiber under test.

6. LAN: Local area network.

7. MCE: Main Communications Equipment Room.

8. M/M: Multimode.

9. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

10. SCSC: Structured Cabling System Contractor.




11. S/M: Single mode.

12. TR: Telecommunications Room

13. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

14. VOIP: Voice Over Internet Protocol

15. WAO: Work Area Outlet.

16. Horizontal Cabling: The portion of the communications cabling system that extends from

the work area outlet (WAO) to the horizontal cross-connect in the TR.

17. Intrabuilding Backbone: The portion of the communications cabling system within a

building that connects each TR to the MCE.

18. Interbuilding Backbone: The portion of the communications cabling system exterior to a

building that connects one building=s MCE to another=s.

19. Active Equipment: The active data network and telephone system equipment will not be

included as a part of this contract. The wiring infrastructure to support connectivity will

be installed under this contract. The contractor shall assist providers of these systems to

integrate and install as required to interface to the cabling systems installed under this

contract.

1.4 Permits And Fees: Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, meters, and inspections

required for his work and pay all fees and charges incidental thereto.

1.5 Verification Of Owner's Data: Prior to commencing work the Contractor shall satisfy himself

as to the accuracy of all data indicated on the Drawings and/or provided by the Owner. Should

the Contractor discover any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in the data, he shall immediately

notify the Engineer. Commencement of work by the Contractor shall be held as an acceptance

of the data by him after which time the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting

from alleged errors, omissions or inaccuracies of the said data.

1.6 Delivery And Storage Of Materials: Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage,


protection from the weather and damage.

1.7 Extent of work is indicated in the Drawings, Schedules, and Specification. Singular references

shall not be construed as requiring only one device if multiple devices are shown on the

Drawings or are required for proper system operation.

1.8 Field Measurements And Coordination

1.9 The intent of the Drawings and Specifications is to obtain a complete and satisfactory

installation. Separate divisional Drawings and Specifications shall not relieve the Contractor




or Subcontractors from full compliance of work of his trade indicated on any of the Drawings

or in any Section of the Specifications. Report conflicts prior to start of work.

A. Verify all field dimensions and locations of equipment to insure close, neat fit with other trades'

work. Make use of all Contract Documents and approved shop drawings to verify exact

dimension and locations. Do not scale structured cabling system drawings, rely on dimensions

shown on architectural or structural drawings.

B. Coordinate work in this Division with all other trades in proper sequence to insure that the total

work is completed within Contract time schedule and with minimum cutting and patching.

C. Locate all equipment, materials, and apparatus symmetrical with architectural elements. Install

to exact height and locations when shown on architectural drawings. When locations are shown

only on structured cabling system drawings, be guided by architectural details and conditions

existing at job and correlate this work with that of others.

D. Install work as required to fit structure, avoid obstructions, and retain clearance, headroom,

openings and passageways. Cut no structural members without written approval from Engineer

or Architect.

E. Carefully examine any existing conditions, piping, and premises. Compare Drawings with

existing conditions. Report any observed discrepancies. Written instructions will be issued by

the Engineer to resolve discrepancies.

F. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets and fittings

or to locate every accessory. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Study carefully the sizes

and locations of structural members, wall and partition locations, trusses, and room dimensions

and take actual measurements on the job. Locate material, equipment and accessories with


measurements and shall not order materials or perform work without verification. No extra

compensation will be allowed because field measurements vary from the dimensions on the

Drawings. If field measurements show that equipment or material cannot be fitted, the Engineer

shall be consulted. Remove and relocate, without additional compensation, any item that is

installed and is later found to encroach on space assigned to another use.

1.10 Guarantee And Service:

A. Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation

without voiding Contractor's Guarantee Bond nor relieving Contractor of his responsibilities

during guarantee period.

B. The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year from

Substantial Completion, or from Owner's occupancy, whichever is earlier. Contractor shall

make good any defects and shall include all necessary adjustments to and replacement of

defective items without expense to the Owner.

C. Special Structured Cabling System Warranty:

1. See sections 27 13 00 and 27 15 00 for special structured cabling system warranty.




1.11 Codes And Standards

A. All work done under this contract shall be performed in accordance with the most recent issue

of the following codes, standards and guidelines. Where there is a perceived conflict between a

standard or guideline and the contract documents, the Contractor shall perform the work as

directed by the Engineer.

B. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

C. NEC - 2005 Edition

D. TIA/EIA-568-A-5 Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm

Enhanced Category 5 Cabling

E. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

F. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces

G. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings - May, 2002

H. ANSI/J-STD-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications

I. BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) - 11th Edition

J. SCTE - Society of Cable Television Engineers

K. UWF – Building Design & Construction Standards, December 2010


A. When approved, the submittal control log and submittals shall be an addition to the

specifications herewith, and shall be of equal force in that no deviation will be permitted except

with the approval of the Architect/Engineer.

B. Shop drawings, product literature, and other approval submittals will only be reviewed if they

are submitted in full accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification sections and the following:

1. Submittals shall be properly organized in accordance with the approved submittal control

log.

2. Submittals shall not include items from more than one specification section in the same

submittal package unless approved in the submittal control log.

3. Submittals shall be properly identified by a cover sheet showing the project name,

Architect and Engineer names, submittal control number, specification section, a list of

products or item names with model numbers in the order they appear in the package, and

spaces for approval stamps. A sample cover sheet is included at the end of this section.




4. Submittals shall have been reviewed and approved by the General Contractor (or Prime

Contractor). Evidence of this review and approval shall be an "Approved" stamp with a

signature and date on the cover sheet.

5. Submittals that include a series of devices shall be organized by device and be marked

accordingly.

C. If the shop drawings show variation from the requirements of contract because of standard shop

practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variation in

writing in his letter of transmittal and on the submittal cover sheet in order that, if acceptable,

Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with

the contract.

D. Review of shop drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules shall not relieve the

Contractor from responsibility for deviations from contract drawings or specifications, unless he

has in writing called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer each such deviation in writing at

the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop

drawings, product literature, catalog data, or schedules. Any feature or function specified but

not mentioned in the submittal shall be assumed to be included per the specification.

E. Submit shop drawings as called for in other sections after award of the contract and before any

material is ordered or fabricated. Shop drawings shall consist of plans, sections, elevations and

details to scale (not smaller than 3" per foot), with dimensions clearly showing the installation.

Direct copies of small scale project drawings issued to the Contractor are not acceptable.

Drawings shall take into account equipment furnished under other sections and shall show space

allotted for it. Include construction details and materials.

1.13 Test Reports And Verification Submittals: Submit test reports, certifications and verification

letters as called for in other sections. Contractor shall coordinate the required testing and

documentation of system performance such that sufficient time exists to prepare the reports,

submit the reports, review the reports and take corrective action within the scheduled contract

time. Where testing by an independent testing agency is required or selected by the Contractor,

the requirements below shall be met.

A. The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of structured cabling system

equipment devices, installations, and systems.

B. The testing firm shall utilize technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for testing

services.

1.14 O&M Data Submittals: Submit Operation and Maintenance data as called for in other sections.

When a copy of approval submittals is included in the O&M Manual, only the final “Furnish as

Submitted” or “Furnish as Corrected” copy shall be used. Contractor shall organize these data

in the O&M Manuals tabbed by specification number. Prepare O&M Manuals as required by

Division 1 and as described herein. Submit manuals at the Substantial Completion inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2.1 All materials shall be new or Owner-supplied reused as shown on the drawings, the best of

their respective kinds, suitable for the conditions and duties imposed on them at the building

and shall be of reputable manufacturers. The description, characteristics, and requirements of

materials to be used shall be in accordance with qualifying conditions established in the

following sections.

2.2 Equipment And Materials

A. Shall be new and the most suitable grade for the purpose intended. Equipment furnished under

this division shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of

such items for a period of three years. Where practical, all of the components shall be products

of a single manufacturer in order to provide proper coordination and responsibility. Where

required, Contractor shall furnish proof of installation of similar units or equipment.

B. Each item of equipment shall bear a name plate showing the manufacturer's name, trade name,

model number, serial number, ratings and other information necessary to fully identify it. This

plate shall be permanently mounted in a prominent location and shall not be concealed,

insulated or painted.

C. The equipment shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in


D. A service organization with personnel and spare parts shall be available within two hours for

each type of equipment furnished.

E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place in service by a factory

trained representative where required.

F. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple manufacturers to


the Drawings have been used as basis for design; it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to

ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products meet detailed specifications and that size and

arrangement of equipment are suitable for installation.

G. Model Numbers: Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the Drawings and

Specifications are used as a guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the

Contractor's convenience. The Contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for

ordering equipment and materials in accordance with the written description of each item and

with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

2.3 Requests For Substitution

A. Where a particular system, product or material is specified by name, consider it as standard

basis for bidding, and base proposal on the particular system, product or material specified.

B. Requests by Contractor for substitution will be considered only when reasonable, timely, fully

documented, and qualifying under one or more of the following circumstances.

C. Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements.




D. Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non-compatible,

or cannot be properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other recognized disability as

certified by Contractor.

E. Substantial cost advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including

delays, additional compensation for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary

services and similar considerations.

F. All requests for substitution shall contain a "Comparison Schedule" and clearly and specifically

indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as the basis of

design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include but shall not be

limited to data as follows for both the specified and substituted products:

1. Principal of operation.

2. Materials of construction or finishes.

3. Thickness of gauge of materials.

4. Weight of item.

5. Deleted features or items.

6. Added features or items.

7. Changes in other work caused by the substitution.

8. Performance curves.

G. If the approved substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the

attention of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner reserves the right to require equal or similar

features to be added to the substituted products (or to have the substituted products replaced) at

the Contractor's expense.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed and completed in a first-class

workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best modern methods and practice. Any

materials installed which do not present an orderly and reasonably neat and/or workmanlike

appearance, or do not allow adequate space for maintenance, shall be removed and replaced

when so directed by the Architect/Engineer.

3.2 Coordination

3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the structured cabling system with

shop drawings of the building construction so the proper openings and sleeves or supports etc.,

are provided for conduit, devices, or other equipment passing through slabs or walls.

A. Any additional steel supports required for the installation of any structured cabling system

equipment, devices or conduit shall be provided by the Contractor.




B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that all equipment that may require maintenance

and operation are made easily accessible, regardless of the diagrammatic location shown on the

Drawings.

C. All connections to devices and equipment shown on the Drawings shall be considered

diagrammatic unless otherwise indicated by a specific detail on the Drawings. The actual

connections shall be made to fully suit the requirements of each case and adequately provide for

servicing.

D. The Contractor shall protect equipment and devices at all times during storage and construction.

He shall replace all equipment and devices which are damaged as a result of inadequate

protection.

E. Prior to starting and during progress of work, examine work and materials installed by others as

they apply to work in this division. Report conditions which will prevent satisfactory

installation.

F. Start of work will be construed as acceptance of suitability of work of others.

G. Interruption of Service: Before any equipment is shut down for disconnecting or tie-ins,

arrangements shall be made with the Architect/Engineer and this work shall be done at the time

best suited to the Owner. This will typically be on weekends and/or holidays and/or after

normal working hours. Services shall be restored the same day unless prior arrangements are

made. All overtime or premium costs associated with this work shall be included in the base

bid.

H. Service Coordination: Prior to commencing any work , coordinate with utility/service provider

to ensure proper services are available to project when needed.

I. Cutting and Patching: Notify General Contractor to do all cutting and patching of all holes,

chases, sleeves, and other openings required for installation of equipment furnished and

installed under this section. Utilize experienced trades for cutting and patching. Obtain

permission from Architect/Engineer before cutting any structural items.

J. Equipment Setting: Bolt equipment directly to concrete pads or foundations, using hot-dipped

galvanized anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Level equipment.

3.4 Painting: Touch-up factory finishes on equipment located inside and outside shall be done

under Division 27. Obtain matched color coatings from the manufacturer and apply as directed

by manufacturer. If corrosion is found during inspection on the surface of any equipment,

clean, prime, and paint, as required.

3.5 Clean-Up: Thoroughly clean all exposed parts of apparatus and equipment of cement, plaster,

and other materials and remove all oil and grease spots. Repaint or touch up as required to

look like new. During progress of work, Contractor is to carefully clean and leave premises

free from debris and in a safe condition.




3.6 Operation And Maintenance Manuals: Furnish four complete manuals bound in ring binders

with Table of Contents, organized, and tabbed by specification section.

3.7 Start-Up And Operational Test: Start each item of equipment in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions; or where noted under equipment specification, start-up shall be

done by a qualified representative of the manufacturer. Alignment, lubrication, safety, and

operating control shall be included in start-up check.

3.8 Record Drawings

A. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall record on their field set of Drawings the

corrections, variations, and deviations for systems which are not installed exactly as shown on

the Contract Drawings.


Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Sections.

3.9 Acceptance

A. Punch List: Submit written confirmation that all punch lists have been checked and the required

work completed.

B. Instructions: At completion of the work, provide a competent and experienced person who is

thoroughly familiar with the project, for a period deemed necessary by the Owner to instruct

permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish complete manuals bound in ring binders and

organized by system or section.

D. Record Drawings: Submit "Record Drawings".

E. Acceptance will be on the basis of tests and inspections of the work. A representative of the

firm which performed the testing shall be in attendance to assist during inspection. Contractor

shall furnish necessary electricians to operate system, make any necessary adjustments and

assist with final inspection.




CODES AND STANDARDS 27 00 10 - 1 of 2

SECTION 27 00 10 - CODES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 All work under Division 27 shall be constructed in accordance with the codes and standards

listed herein. The design has been based on the requirements of these codes and standards.

While it is not the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that all work called for complies

with these codes and standards, he shall be responsible for calling to the Engineer's attention

any details on the Drawings and/or Specifications that are not in conformance with these or

other codes and standards. Current issue of code applies unless specifically noted otherwise.

1.2 Comply with regulations and codes of suppliers of utilities.

1.3 Where no specific method or form of construction is called for in the Contract Documents, the


1.4 Where code conflict exists, generally the most stringent requirement applies.

1.5 Codes or standards applying to a specific part of the work may be included in that section.

PART 2 - CODES

2.1 Florida Building Code - Building - 2010 with 2012 amendments.

2.2 National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) - 2008

2.3 National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) - 2010

2.4 Standard for Health Care Facilities (NFPA-99) – 2005

2.5 Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) – 2009 Florida Edition

2.6 Florida Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Implementation Act (October 1, 1993) as

described in Accessibility Requirements Manual, Department of Community Affairs (January 1,

1997).



CODES AND STANDARDS 27 00 10 - 2 of 2

2.7 Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

PART 3 - STANDARDS

A. All electrical materials, installation and systems shall meet the requirements of the following

standards, including the latest addenda and amendments:

1. American National Standard Institutes (ANSI)

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Associations (NEMA).

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

6. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

7. TIA/EIA-568-A-5 Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100

Ohm Enhanced Category 5 Cabling

8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

9. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces

10. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings – May, 2002

11. ANSI/J-STD-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications

12. BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) – 11th Edition

13. SCTE - Society of Cable Television Engineers

14. University of West Florida Building Design and Construction Standards, December 2010




CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 27 00 20- 1 of 2

SECTION 27 00 20 - CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary

A. This Section includes Structured Cabling System Contractor qualifications.


A. Structured Cabling System Contractor Installer Qualifications:

1. The Structured Cabling System Contractor (SCSC) shall be regularly engaged in the

layout and installation of structured cabling systems of similar size and complexity as

required for this installation. The Structured Cabling System Contractor shall have

successfully completed the layout, installation, testing and warranty of not less than five

Structured Cabling Systems of the scope of the largest system on this project for a

minimum period of three years prior to the bid date, and shall have been regularly

engaged in the business of Structured Cabling Systems contracting continuously since.

The Contractor shall have an existing permanent office located within 100 miles of the

job site from which installation and warranty service operations will be performed.

2. The SCSC shall present the name and certification number of a BICSI certified

Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) who is a permanent

employee of the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain this RCDD, in his permanent

employment throughout this project. The RCDD shall have overall responsibility for

certifying that the installed structured cabling system conforms to these contract

documents.

3. The Structured Cabling System Subcontractor’s present on site Project Manager, Fore

Person, Lead Techs, and all Technicians shall be Factory Certified to install this

building’s Structured Cabling system. The Structured Cabling System Subcontractor shall

provide copies of all on site personnel’s Factory Certifications for the Structured Cabling

System to installed in this building.

1.4 Proof Of Contractor Qualifications

A. The SCSC shall provide the following documentation, as evidence that the requirements for

SCSC qualifications listed above are satisfied.

1. A list of not less than five (5) references for jobs of similar size and complexity including

project name, location, contact person and phone number.



CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 27 00 20- 2 of 2

2. RCDD name, BICSI certification number, and qualifications.

3. Factory Certifications of all onsite personnel.

4. Location of permanent existing office from which installation and warranty work will be

performed.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. NOT APPLICABLE




HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM 27 15 00- 1 of 16

SECTION 27 15 00 – HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Summary:

A. This Section includes:

1. Pathways.

2. UTP cabling.

3. Coaxial cable

4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

6. Fire-stopping products.

7. Identification products.

8. Cable management system.

9. Cable testing.

1.3 System Description:

A. The work consists of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide, install,

test and certify a new horizontal cabling system as described in the contract documents.

B. The installation shall include all accessories and appurtenances required to provide a complete

and operational system. Any materials not specifically mentioned in these specifications or not

shown on the drawings, but required for a complete and finished installation shall be furnished

and installed at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. The installed system shall be a complete and warranted category 6 horizontal cabling system

solution with all outlet and termination hardware and cable assemblies provided by one single

manufacturer. Cabling shall be by the same manufacturer or by a cable manufacturer approved

by the connectivity manufacturer for that particular system solution.

D. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between

the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the TR.




This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the

testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors

be installed for each work area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point

between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

E. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the

telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

F. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length

does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The

maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the

horizontal cross-connect.

1.4 System Solution:

A. Provide one of the following solutions:

1. Panduit, TX 6000.

2. Berk-tek / Ortronics, Netclear GT2

3. Comm Scope, Uniprise.

1.5 Performance Requirements:

A. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code,

Standard Building Code and OSHA recommendations, and the rules, regulations and

requirements of Federal Communications Commission.

B. The installation shall comply fully with all county, city, and state laws and ordinances,

regulations and codes applicable to the installation.

C. Local electrical and building codes may differ with national codes. Follow the most stringent

code or recommendations. Where there are instances of ambiguity, refer to the Owner/Engineer

for interpretation.

D. All equipment shall be equal to or exceed the minimum requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ASME,

ANSI, TIA/EIA and Underwriters’ Laboratories.

E. Should any change in plans or specifications be required to comply with governmental

regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Owner at the time of submitting the construction

schedule.




F. All work done under this contract shall be performed in accordance with the most recent issue

of the codes, standards and guidelines stated in section 27 00 00. Where there is a perceived

conflict between a standard or guideline and the contract documents, the Contractor shall

perform the work as directed by the Engineer.

G. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 Special Structured Cabling System Warranty

1.7 The Contractor shall warrant the entire structured cabling system (End-to-End Certification)

under the manufacturer’s systems warranty for a minimum period of 15 years. The warranty

will begin on the first day after final acceptance. The warranty shall include cable and

connectivity components and have one point of contact for all cabling system issues. The

warranty shall include materials, parts and labor. If any failure or defect occurs within the

warranty period, the contractor and/or manufacturers shall remedy it within 48 hours at no cost

to the owner, or any owner representative or consultant. Structured cabling systems warranty

shall cover cable, connecting hardware and the labor cost for the repair or replacement.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, specifications and installation

instructions for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and

format selected by Owner.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and testing

supervisor.

D. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size

and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical features.

E. Test Reports and Verification Submittals:

1. Cable Field Testing: Submit as described in these specifications.

2. Training: Submit letter verifying that Owner training has been received as described in

these specifications.

F. O&M Data Submittals:

1. Submit as described in these specifications.





A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Level 2

Installer who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at

Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site

testing.


by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

1.10 Project Conditions:

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet

work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining

ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the

construction period.

1.11 Coordination:

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Pathways:

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent

degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

C. Inside TRs:




1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Lacing bars, spools and D-rings.

3. Straps and other devices.

4. Cable trays.

5. Ladder trays.

D. Outside TRs:

1. Horizontal cabling shall be routed in 1 inch or larger EMT conduit from outlet boxes to J-

hooks, then J-hooks to the serving TR. Outlet boxes shall be a minimum of 4 inches by 4

inches by 2 1/8 inches. Conduit materials shall be as specified in section 26 05 30.

2.2 UTP Cable:


following:

1. Ortronics, Inc., or Ortronics approved system partner.

2. PAN-NET Panduit Corp., or Panduit approved system partner.

3. Amp/Netconnect or Amp/Netconnect approved system partner.

B. Category 6 Horizontal Cable:

1. 100-ohm, four unshielded twisted pairs of 23 or 24 AWG copper, insulated solid

conductors enclosed by an overall jacket.

2. The cable shall exceed the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.

3. Plenum (CMP) rated.

4. Cable jacket color shall be blue unless noted otherwise.

5. Supports the following applications: Ethernet 10Base-T, 100Base-T (Fast Ethernet),

1000Base-T (Gigabit Ethernet); 1.2 Gb/s ATM; Token Ring 4/16; digital video; and

broadband/baseband analog video.

6. Performance tested to 650 MHz.

a. Gel filled cable to be used for all underground cabling requirements between

buildings. Use Mohawk M57622 or equal to all slab on grade floor boxes.




2.3 UTP Cable Hardware:


following:

1. Ortronics, Inc., or Ortronics approved system partner.

2. Panduit Corp., or Panduit approved system partner.

3. Comm Scope or Comm Scope approved system partner.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC

type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with

connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Work Area Outlets (WAOs):

1. Accommodate up to 6-ports per gang.

2. Have labels for circuit identification with a clear plastic cover and tool-less removal

3. Have stainless steel and gravity feed versions available.

4. Have surface mount boxes and standoff rings available for both single and double gang

faceplates.

5. Have rear protective strain relief caps with side or rear entry, which can be installed onto

cable before or after termination.

6. Support T568A or T568B wiring.

7. Allow jack installation from the front or rear of the faceplate, and allow for the jack to

pass through the faceplate without re-termination.

D. Copper Patch Panels:

1. Use the same modular jacks used in the WAOs.

2. Black aluminum construction.

3. 24 (1 RU), 48 (2 RU) and 72 (3 RU) port configurations.

4. Allow terminated jacks to pass through panel for easy rearrangement without re-

termination.

5. Have a rear wire management bar.

6. Provided with labels and self-adhesive clear label holders.




2.4 Coaxial Cable:


following:

1. Alpha Wire Company.

2. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.

3. Coleman Cable, Inc.

4. CommScope, Inc.

5. Draka USA.

6. Times Warner Cable.

7. General Cable.

B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer

specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall

have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-6:

1. No. 18 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Quad shield foil braid construction with 100 percent aluminum tape, 60 percent

aluminum braid, 100 percent aluminum tape, 40 percent aluminum braid.

3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.

4. Suitable for indoor installations.

D. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70, "Radio and Television Equipment"

and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

E. CATV Cable: Type CATV.

1. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.

2. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666.

2.5 Coaxial Cable Hardware:


following:

1. Blonder Tongue.

2. Toner.




B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms. Connectors for RG-6 shall be F crimp type,

Toner #F56-342.

C. Video Cabling Splitters, Taps, Amplifiers, etc:

1. Shall be as specified on the drawings or equal. Cap all unused ports of all splitters.

Ground each TVSS device, splitter, tap, amplifier, etc with a #6AWG to the local TGB.

2.6 Patch Cords

A. Category 6 UTP modular patch cable:

1. Assembly shall meet TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 Category 6 standard, factory assembled and

tested.

2. 24 AWG stranded, 4 pair.

3. Gold plated plug contacts

4. Universal T568A/B compatibility.

5. Modular and snag-less 8 position plug (RJ45) on each end.

6. PVC jacket.

2.7 Other Equipment:

A. In-Ceiling Consolidation Point:

1. The enclosure is a termination/distribution/consolidation access point for low voltage

communication applications within a ceiling grid system.

2. Shall consist of a termination box that fits in a standard 2' x 2' ceiling grid space. It shall

have a lockable hinged front that swings down allowing access to a 19" rack housing a

high density copper patch panel (see above description for patch panel). It shall be

independently supported to the building structure by a threaded rod at each of the four

corners.

B. Grounding Products:

1. All grounding products used shall comply with J-STD-607A.

2. Cables shall be insulated (green) with stranded copper conductors.

C. Fire-stopping Products:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

2. S.T.I.




3. 3M.

4. Wiremold.

D. Cable Ties:

1. Provide hook and loop cable ties. Provide plenum rated where required.

2.8 Identification Products:

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Wiring Methods:

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except within TRs. Conceal raceway and cables

except in unfinished spaces.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to

terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending

radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.2 Installation of Pathways:

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

D. Pathway Installation in TRs:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood

is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed

around perimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays around perimeter of room.

3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.




4. Extend conduits above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

E. Backboards: Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.3 Installation of Cables:

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 12

inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames,

and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling

Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat

lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In TRs, install a 10 foot long service loop on each end of cable.

11. Support all cable not installed in conduit or cable tray using cable support brackets and

D-rings installed on 12” centers minimum.

12. All cables shall be bundled and cable tie wrapped together. Cables shall be separately

bundled with like cables (e.g., multimode fiber, single mode fiber, voice backbone,

horizontal cables). Velcro tie wrapping shall occur on 12 inch (6 inch for vertical cable

runs) intervals throughout the TRs unless noted otherwise. Tie wraps should not bite into




the cable insulation, but should form securely around the cables so as not to depress the

cable.

13. All cables shall be neatly bundled and cable tie wrapped down to the racks and patch

panels. Group horizontal cables with not more than 24 cables per bundle.

14. Route cables along cable rack trays in a neat and straight order in 24 cable bundles. Use

drop out shields to protect cables as they drop out of cable trays or cable rack trays. Use

rear of vertical cable management rails at racks to support and manage cables terminated

to rear of patch panels. Maintain a neat and straight order of the cables inside the cable

management rails. Adjust length of cables terminating on the rear of patch panels so that

cables exit out of vertical cable management rail, fan into the proper port and are punched

down in the proper order.

15. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull

tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating

unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,

including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.






4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall

be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches.

3.4 Firestopping:

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 Grounding:

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor. Do not loop grounds. Ground all racks, punchdown block

towers, etc individually from busbar. Route along rack rear across runway and to busbar.

3.6 Identification:

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Administration Class: 3.




2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. See Division 27 Section Backbone Cabling System for additional identification requirements.

See Evaluations for discussion about TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section. Paint and

label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 3 level of

administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section Backbone Cabling System.

D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with

rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive

schedules for Project.

E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets,

backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions,

horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and

pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

F. Labels shall have an adhesive backing for permanent attachment where required.

G. All labels shall be of sufficient size. All labels shall be easily readable from floor level when

viewing a backboard, panel, or communications outlet from the front.

H. All labels shall be installed straight.

I. Provide temporary labels on all horizontal cables as they are roughed-in.

J. Text shall be as large and as bold as possible.

K. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that

contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the

following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.

L. The following items shall receive labeling:

1. Cables.

2. Raceways (both ends).




3. Patch panels.

4. Patch panel ports.

5. Firestop locations.

M. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at

device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within

panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at

intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

5. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each

cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted

device with name and number of particular device as shown.

6. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

7. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label

each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.

Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,

use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

3.7 Constructing Names:

A. Example name for equipment:

1. 0053-2C-CPL1A

2. This element starts in building 0053 TR2C and is a copper twisted pair patch panel

located in rack 1 and is index A.

B. The following is a list of equipment elements:

1. WAO = work area outlet.

2. CPL = copper twisted pair panel.

C. Example name for horizontal cable:




1. 0053-1A-2D38

2. This horizontal cable terminates in building 0053 TR1A, in pathway rack #2, in

horizontal patch panel D, port 38.

3.8 Field Quality Control:

A. Perform the following tests and inspections.

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings.

Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with

color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with

TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

B. UTP Performance Field Tests:

1. Test for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and

TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

a. Wire map.

b. Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).

c. Insertion loss.

d. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.

e. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.

f. Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).

g. Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).

h. Return loss.

i. Propagation delay.

j. Delay skew.

C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a

summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the

instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.




3.9 Patch Cord Delivery:

A. Deliver all patch cords to the Owner along with a typed inventory of the patch cords broken

down by type and length as scheduled on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide a copy of

the inventory, signed by the Owner, in the O&M Manuals.

3.10 Owner Personnel Training:

A. After Substantial Completion but before Final Completion, provide on-site training to Owner

personnel on the operation and use of the system. Provide one copy of the training material.

B. The Engineer shall be notified prior to training and may participate in training at their

discretion.

C. The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by personnel who

are thoroughly familiar with the structured cabling system installation and who have

demonstrated knowledge in the data equipment specified for installation under the project.

D. Training shall include a "walk-through" of the systems to identify and locate closets, panels, and

important system components, a discussion of overall system concepts and configuration,

specific instruction in labeling, a review of the as-built drawings, a review of the system

verification and acceptance documentation, and guidelines for basic trouble-shooting and

operation of the structured cabling system.

E. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in

cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different

workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and

revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. Include training in

cabling administration software.

F. The Contractor shall provide documentation of training (including names of personnel present

at each training session) to the Engineer at the Final Completion Inspection. The

documentation shall be signed-off by the Owner. The documentation shall be three-hole

punched and ready for insertion in the O&M manuals.
